The Safety Compendium

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "The Safety Compendium"

Transcription

1 The Safety Compendium For the application of functional safety standards. Orientation Guide!

2

3 Contents The new Safety Compendium 1 Preface 2 Standards, directives and laws 3 Safeguards 4 Safe control technology 5 Safe communication 6 Safe motion 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 8 Appendix

4

5 1 Preface

6

7 Chapter 1 Contents 1 Preface Chapter Contents Page 1 Preface Authors

8

9 Chapter 1 Preface 1 Preface The world is constantly changing and the tasks and requirements in mechanical engineering are changing with it. Our Safety Compendium first appeared in The aim was to provide our customers with a handy orientation guide on the subject of functional safety and standards. The wide range of feedback we received shows that we succeeded. Since then there have been further changes: More efficient production and automation concepts demand ever more intelligent safety solutions. Or may only be made possible thanks to innovative safety technology. And from 2012, the new Machinery Directive applies without restrictions. This presents machine builders and users with new challenges, which need to be overcome. Enough reasons, then, to revise our Safety Compendium and add some relevant points. So the issues of mechanics versus electronics and dynamic versus inflexible control and safety concepts have now been added to the Safety Compendium. For the trend over recent years to replace mechanics with electronics in safety technology continues unabated. Another trend is also emerging: The more dynamic the processes, the higher the demand to enable controlled access to the process, without comprising on performance and productivity. That s why flexible and dynamic concepts are increasingly in demand in safety technology in future, a safe shutdown will only be a last resort in exceptional, justified circumstances. Against a background of rising demands on availability and productivity, integrated control and safety concepts are becoming increasingly significant. Pilz has already reacted to current trends and set new standards with a range of new products and solutions, such as the automation system PSS 4000 for safety and standard, the first safe three-dimensional camera system SafetyEYE, the safety gate system PSENsgate or safe motion. One thing we re quite sure of: Customer proximity and innovation belong together and are mutually dependent. That s why the company s products are often developed in conjunction with or under contract from customers. So the process of idea development and innovation is a constant, mutually beneficial exchange. Establishing trends in the field of products and solutions is only part of our response to the new requirements, however. Our services portfolio helps machine builders and users get to grips with the large number of standards and how they are implemented. Plus we lighten the load for companies, who can delegate their responsibility for safety issues. The huge demand in this area has confirmed that we are on the right track with our range of services relating to risk assessment, conformity assessment and CE certification. Pilz also operates an independent, accredited inspection body in accordance with the requirements of DIN EN ISO/ IEC 17020, as accredited by the German Accreditation Body (DAkkS). This guarantees objectivity, high machine availability and the highest possible safety for staff. In the future, the main purpose of safety technology will still be to make automated processes safer for man and the environment. More than ever, this is linked with the demand for production cycles to be designed to run more smoothly and efficiently. So safety technology is developing into an overall discipline that encompasses product plus safety and permanently shapes the entire of plant and machine lifecycle. 1-3

10 Chapter 1 Preface 1 Preface The Safety Compendium is intended to help you face existing challenges and meet future requirements, while also serving as an informative reference. As I said earlier, ideas and innovations can only emerge in a process of constant exchange and as the Compendium too is the result of lively discourse between editors and readers, we really welcome your feedback. After all, a constructive exchange can make the Compendium even more valuable. So in this spirit I hope you find the book informative and insightful. Renate Pilz Managing Partner Pilz GmbH & Co. KG 1-4

11 Chapter 1 Preface 1.1 Authors Christian Bittner is acting team leader of the Consulting Services Group within Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He is in direct contact with customers: His duties include performing risk assessments, producing safety concepts, CE certification and other safety services. On behalf of Pilz he is also head of the DAkkS-accredited inspection body. Holger Bode is responsible for the international co-ordination of Pilz Services within the Pilz International Services Group. Part of his role is to create specifications for internationally harmonised services such as risk assessment, safety concepts, CE marking and inspection of safeguards. He is also a member of Pilz s internal standards committee. Harald Förster is head of the Customer Support department and a member of the management team at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He is an expert in the field of safety and automation technology, from development and design through to its practical application for the customer. Roland Gaiser is head of the Actuator Systems division in development at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He also lectures on system development and simulation at the Faculty of Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering at Esslingen University. He has extensive knowledge in the field of basic development of actuator systems. 1-5

12 Chapter 1 Preface 1.1 Authors Andreas Hahn is head of the Networks, Control Systems and Actuator Technology division in product management at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He is also involved in Pilz s internal standards committee, which deals with the interpretation of standards. He has many years experience in the design of automation solutions. Jürgen Hasel is a trainer and consultant at Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG His seminars focus on pneumatics, electropneumatics, valve terminals and safety technology. Earlier in his career he worked in the development department at Festo AG. He has been working closely with the training department of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG for some years. At Pilz he teaches the CMSE course (Certified Machinery Safety Expert) certified by TÜV Nord, as part of product-neutral training. Prof. Dr. Thomas Klindt is a partner at the international law firm NOERR and is also honorary professor for Product and Technology Law at the University of Kassel. He is a member of the chamber s internal product safety & product liability practice group, which oversees national and international product liability processes, product recalls and compensation claims. Thomas Kramer-Wolf is the standards specialist at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He is a member of various standards committees and combines theoretical work with practical interpretation of standards, also as part of Pilz s internal standards committee. 1-6

13 Chapter 1 Preface 1.1 Authors Dr. Alfred Neudörfer is a lecturer in the Faculty of Mechanical Engineering at Darmstadt University of Technology. He is also a guest professor in safety technology at Nagaoka University of Technology in Japan. The subject of many of his lectures, seminars and technical papers is the design of safetyrelated products. Andreas Schott is responsible for the Training and Education division within Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. As team leader, he works with his team to produce educational and practically relevant training concepts for both product-neutral and product-specific courses and seminars. His many years of experience as a state-approved electrical engineer and software programmer have familiarised him with the practical requirements of customers when it comes to safety technology. Eszter Fazakas, LL.M. is a lawyer with the international law firm NOERR. She is also a member of the chamber s internal product safety & product liability practice group, which oversees national and international product liability processes, product recalls and compensation claims. Gerd Wemmer works as an application engineer in Customer Support at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He is responsible for consultancy, project engineering and the preparation of safety concepts for customers, from machine manufacturers to end users. He has many years practical experience in safety technology. 1-7

14 Chapter 1 Preface 1.1 Authors Matthias Wimmer works in Customer Support at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. He presents seminars on various subjects, including: New functional safety standards, New Machinery Directive and Safeguards. As an application engineer he produces risk assessments and safety concepts for machinery. He is also a member of the standards working group ISO/TC 199/WG 8, Safe control systems. Michael Wustlich is team leader of the Software, Application and Tests division at Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. His duties include the development of user-level safety-related software in the form of standardised, certified products. Together with his team he is responsible for the specification and design of systematised application tests across all product groups. 1-8

15

16

17 2 Standards, directives and laws

18

19 Chapter 2 Contents 2 Standards, directives and laws Chapter Contents Page 2 Standards, directives and laws Standards, directives and laws in the European Union (EU) CE marking The basis of machine safety: Machinery Directive and CE mark Legal principles CE marking of machinery Directives Machinery Directive Standards Publishers and scope EN engineering safety standards Generic standards and design specifications Product standards Application standards International comparison of standards, directives and laws Directives and laws in America Directives and laws in Asia Directives and laws in Oceania Summary Validation Verification of safety functions in accordance with EN ISO / Verification of safety functions in accordance with EN General information about the validation plan Validation by analysis Validation by testing Verification of safety functions Validation of software Validation of resistance to environmental requirements Production of validation report Conclusion Appendix Certification and accreditation Accreditation: Quality seal for customers Accreditation or certification Tests in accordance with industrial safety regulations (BetrSichV) and accreditation Conclusion

20

21 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.1 Standards, directives and laws in the European Union (EU) The European Union is increasingly merging. Machine builders will recognise this in the increasing harmonisation of laws, regulations and provisions. Not that long ago, each country published its own guidelines on the different areas of daily life and the economy, but today you ll find more and more standardised regulations within Europe. How are European laws, directives and standards connected? Initially, the EU formulates general safety objectives via directives. These safety objectives need to be specified more precisely; the actual provision is made via standards. EU directives generally deal with specific issues. The directives themselves have no direct impact on individual citizens or companies. They only come into effect through the agreements of individual countries within the EU, who incorporate these directives into their domestic law. In each EU country, a law or provision refers to the relevant EU directive and thus elevates it to the status of domestic law. Between the time a directive is adopted and the point at which it is incorporated into domestic law there is inevitably a transition period, during which time the directive awaits incorporation into domestic law in the individual countries. However, for users this is generally unimportant because the directives themselves provide clear indication on the respective validity date. So although the titles of these documents describe them almost harmlessly as directives, in practice they have legal status within the EU. This explains how laws and directives are connected, but doesn t deal with the issue of the standards. Although the standards themselves make interesting reading, on their own they have no direct legal relevance until they are published in the Official Journal of the EU or are referenced in domestic laws and provisions. These are the publications by which a standard can acquire presumption of conformity. Presumption of conformity means that a manufacturer can assume he has met the requirements of the corresponding directive provided he has complied with the specifications in the standard. So presumption of conformity confirms proper conduct, as it were. In a formal, legal context this is called a reversal of the burden of proof. Where the EU government EU treaties require national implementation of EU documents into national documents Governments of EU states initiates writes translate/ adopt write/ EU standard EU standards EN... EU directives Content is identical National laws National standards DIN/BS/... EU Official Journal links EN standards to EU directives national standards are linked to national laws Relationship between harmonised standards and laws in the EU. 2-3

22 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.1 Standards, directives and laws in the European Union (EU) manufacturer applies a harmonised standard, if there is any doubt, misconduct will need to be proven. Where the manufacturer has not applied a harmonised standard, he will need to prove that he has acted in compliance with the directives. If a manufacturer does not comply with a standard, it does not necessarily mean that he has acted incorrectly. Particularly in innovative industries, relevant standards either may not exist or may be inadequate. The manufacturer must then demonstrate independently that he has taken the necessary care to comply with the safety objectives of the relevant directives. Such a route is usually more complex but, in an innovative industry, it is often unavoidable. It s important to stress that the EU does not publish every standard in the Official Journal, so many are still not harmonised. Even if such a standard is deemed to have considerable technical relevance, it will still not have presumption of conformity. However, sometimes a standard that has not been listed in the EU Official Journal does achieve a status that s comparable with harmonisation. This is the case, for example, when a harmonised standard makes reference to the respective standard. The standard that is not listed in the EU Official Journal is then harmonised through the back door, as it were. 2-4

23 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking The basis of machine safety: Machinery Directive and CE mark Generally speaking, all directives in accordance with the new concept ( new approach ) provide for CE marking. Where a product falls under the scope of several directives which provide for CE marking, the marking indicates that the product is assumed to conform with the provisions of all these directives Legal principles The obligation to affix CE marking extends to all products which fall under the scope of directives providing for such marking and which are destined for the single market. CE marking should therefore be affixed to the following products that fall under the scope of a directive: When the Machinery Directive (MD) was ratified in 1993, the aim was to remove trade barriers and enable a free internal market within Europe. After a two-year transition period, the Machinery Directive has been binding in Europe since It describes standardised health and safety requirements for interaction between man and machine and replaces the host of individual state regulations that existed on machinery safety. The new Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC has applied since All new products, irrespective of whether they were manufactured in member states or third-party countries Used products imported from third-party countries and second hand products Products that have been substantially modified and fall under the scope of the directives as new products. The directives may exclude certain products from CE marking. The manufacturer uses the declaration of conformity to confirm that his product meets the requirements of the relevant directive(s). The information that follows is intended to explain CE marking in terms of the Machinery Directive. The CE mark stands for Communauté Européenne. A manufacturer uses this mark to document the fact that he has considered all the European internal market directives that are relevant to his product and applied all the appropriate conformity assessment procedures. Products that carry the CE mark may be imported and sold without considering national regulations. That s why the CE mark is also referred to as the Passport to Europe. 2-5

24 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking CE marking of machinery What is a machine? For the purposes of the Directive, one definition of a machine is: An assembly of linked parts or components, at least one of which moves, and which are joined together for a specific application. (see Article 2 of the Machinery Directive) Safety components (The issue of which components to classify as safety components is very controversial. As yet there is no discernible, uniform trend.) Interchangeable equipment that can modify the basic functions of a machine. There is also a list of exceptions where machinery falls under the scope of the Directive by definition, but for which other statutory provisions generally apply CE-marking of plant and machinery According to the Machinery Directive, a machine manufacturer is anyone who assembles machines or machine parts of various origins and places them on the market. A manufacturer may be the actual machine builder or where a machine is modified the operator. In the case of assembled machinery, it may be the manufacturer, an assembler, the project manager, an engineering company or the operator himself, who assembles a new installation from various machines, so that the different machine parts constitute a new machine. Example of a machine for the purposes of the Directive. The following are also considered as machines for the purposes of the Machinery Directive: An assembly of machines or complex plants (complex plants include production lines and special purpose machinery made up of several machines) However, according to the Machinery Directive, only one manufacturer is responsible for the design and manufacture of the machine. This manufacturer or his authorised representative takes responsibility for implementing the administrative procedures for the entire plant. The manufacturer may appoint an authorised representative, who must be established in the EU, to assume responsibility for the necessary procedures for placing the product on the market: Compiling the plant s technical documentation Complying with the technical annex Providing operating instructions for the plant Affixing the CE mark in a suitable position on the plant and drawing up a declaration of conformity for the entire plant 2-6

25 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking It s important that the manufacturer considers the safety aspect early, as the contracts are being formulated or in the components requirement manual. The documentation shall not be compiled solely from the point of view of machine performance. The manufacturer is responsible for the whole of the technical documentation and must determine the part that each of his suppliers is to undertake in this process Use of machinery in the European Economic Area Irrespective of the place and date of manufacture, all machinery used in the European Economic Area for the first time from is subject to the EU Machinery Directive and as such must be CE certified Assembled machinery On large production lines a machine may often consist of several individual machines assembled together. Even if each of these bears its own CE mark, the overall plant must still undergo a CE certification process Importing a machine from a country outside the EU When a machine is imported from a third country for use within the EU, that machine must comply with the Machinery Directive when it is made available on the EU market.anyone who places a machine on the market for the first time within the European Economic Area must have the necessary documentation to establish conformity, or have access to such documentation. This applies whether you are dealing with an old machine or new machinery Machinery for own use The Machinery Directive also obliges users who manufacture machinery for their own use to comply with the Directive. Although there are no problems in terms of free trade - after all, the machine is not to be traded - the Machinery Directive is applied to guarantee that the safety level of the new machine matches that of other machines available on the market. CE certification for individual machines and the overall plant. 2-7

26 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Upgrading machinery Essentially, the Machinery Directive describes the requirements for new machinery. However, if a machine is modified to such an extent that new hazards are anticipated, an analysis will need to be carried out to determine whether the upgrade constitutes a significant modification. If this is the case, the measures to be taken will be the same as those for new machinery. 1. Start: Use per intended modification No 2. Performance data, intended use modified or modules added or modified? Yes 3. Exchange of safety-related machine or control components? No Yes 6. Level of protection is lower in principle or modified safeguard inappropriate? 5. Safeguards changed or modified? Yes No Result: No significant modification 4. Safety behaviour worse due to the design? Yes Yes No Result: No significant modification No 7. Does it involve a new hazard or increased risk? No Yes 8. Safety concept still appropriate, existing safeguard adequate and fully effective? No 9. Complete, appropriate safety achievable by means of additional fixed guards? Yes Yes Yes 10. Irreversible injuries a possibility? No 11. High probability of an accident? No Yes Result: Significant modification No 12. Additional movable guard with interlock is appropriate and effective? Yes Result: No significant modification Significant modification decision tree, as per Significant modifications to machinery from the chemical industry trade association BG Chemie. 2-8

27 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Seven steps to a CE mark 1. Categorise the product 2. Check the application of additional directives 3. Ensure that safety regulations are met 4. Perform the risk assessment 5. Compile the technical documentation 6. Issue the declaration of conformity 7. Affix the CE mark Step 1: Categorise the product The CE marking process starts by categorising the product. The following questions need to be answered: Is the product subject to the Machinery Directive? Is the product listed in Annex IV of the Machinery Directive? Annex IV of the Machinery Directive lists machinery that is considered particularly hazardous, such as presses, woodworking machinery, service lifts, etc. In this case, CE marking and the declaration of conformity must meet special requirements. Is the machine a subsystem or partly completed machinery? Manufacturers issue an EC declaration of conformity for functional machines that meet the full scope of Annex I of the Machinery Directive. For subsystems, e.g. robots, which cannot yet meet the full scope of Annex I, the manufacturer issues a manufacturer s declaration in accordance with Annex II B. The new Machinery Directive refers to subsystems as partly completed machinery. From the moment the new Machinery Directive becomes valid, all partly completed machinery must be accompanied by a declaration of incorporation in accordance with Annex II. At the same time, the manufacturer must perform a risk assessment and provide assembly instructions in accordance with Annex VI. Effectively the manufacturer s declaration or declaration of incorporation bans the subsystem from being put into service, as the machine is incomplete and as such may not be used on its own. Here it s important to note that with the new Machinery Directive coming into force, some new products have been introduced (e.g. pressure vessels, steam boilers and funicular railways), while others have been omitted (e.g. electrical household and office equipment). 2-9

28 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Is it a safety component? Under the old Machinery Directive, safety components are treated separately and are not awarded a CE mark, although it is necessary to produce a declaration of conformity. Under the new Directive they will be treated as machinery and will therefore be given a CE mark. Completed machinery No Machinery listed in ANNEX IV? Yes Documentation by manufacturer ANNEX VII Not considered or only partially considered Documentation by manufacturer ANNEX VII Harmon. standards applied ARTICLE 7 Yes Documentation by manufacturer ANNEX VII Checks on manufacture by manufacturer ANNEX VIII Full quality assurance by manufacturer ANNEX X Checks on manufacture by manufacturer ANNEX VIII Checks on manufacture by manufacturer ANNEX VIII Full quality assurance by manufacturer ANNEX X EC-type examination ANNEX IX CE marking by manufacturer Potential assessment procedures in accordance with the new Machinery Directive. 2-10

29 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Step 2: Check the application of additional directives Where machinery is also subject to other EU directives, which cover different aspects but also provide for the affixing of the CE mark, the provisions of these directives must be met before the CE mark is applied. If the machine contains electrical equipment, for example, it will often be subject to the Low Voltage Directive and, possibly, the EMC Directive too. Step 3: Ensure that safety regulations are met It is the responsibility of the machine manufacturer to comply with the essential health and safety requirements in accordance with Annex I of the Machinery Directive. The formulation of these requirements is relatively abstract, but specifics are provided through the EU standards. The EU publishes lists of directives and the related harmonised standards. Application of these standards is voluntary, but compliance does provide presumption of conformity with the regulations. This can substantially reduce the amount of evidence required, and a lot less work is needed to incorporate the risk assessment. 2-11

30 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Step 4: Perform the risk assessment Extract from a risk analysis 2-12

31 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking The manufacturer is obliged to carry out a risk analysis to determine all the hazards associated with his machine. The result of this analysis must then be considered in the design and construction of that machine. The contents and scope of a hazard analysis are not specified in any directive, but EN ISO describes the general procedure. All relevant hazards must be identified, based on the intended use taking into consideration all the lifecycles once the machine is first made available on the market. All the various groups who come into contact with the machine, such as operating, cleaning or maintenance staff for example, are also considered. The risk is assessed and evaluated for each hazard. Risk-reducing measures are established in accordance with the state of the art and in compliance with the standards. The residual risk is assessed at the same time: If it is too high, additional measures are required. This iterative process is continued until the necessary safety is achieved. Step 5: Compile the technical documentation In accordance with the Machinery Directive, technical documentation specifically comprises: An overall drawing of the machinery and drawings of the control circuits Full, detailed drawings (accompanied by any calculation notes, test results, etc.) required to check the conformity of the machinery with the essential health and safety requirements A list of the essential requirements of this directive, standards and other technical specifications used in the design of the machinery, a description of the protective measures implemented to eliminate hazards presented by the machinery (generally covered by the risk analysis) Technical reports or certificates; reports or test results showing conformity The machine s operating instructions A general machine description Declaration of conformity or declaration of incorporation plus the assembly instructions Declarations of conformity for the machines or devices incorporated into the machinery This documentation does not have to be permanently available in material form. However, it must be possible to assemble it and make it available within a period of time commensurate with its importance. It must be retained for at least ten years following the date of manufacture and be available to present to the relevant national authorities. In the case of series manufacture, that period shall start on the date that the last machine is produced. 2-13

32 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.2 CE marking Step 6: Issue the declaration of conformity By issuing the EC declaration of conformity, the manufacturer declares that they have considered all the directives that apply to the product. The person signing an EC declaration of conformity must be authorised to represent his company. This means that the signatory is legally entitled to execute a legal transaction, such as signing the EC declaration of conformity, on account of their job function. When an authorised employee of the company adds their valid signature to an EC declaration of conformity, they trigger the liability of the natural responsible person and, if applicable, the company as a legal entity. The declaration may also be signed by an authorised representative, who is established in the EU. The new Machinery Directive requires the declaration to name the person authorised to compile the technical documentation. This person must be established in the EU. Step 7: Affix the CE marking CE mark characteristics The CE mark may be affixed once the EC declaration of conformity has been issued. It s important that CE marking for the complete machine is clearly distinguishable from any other CE markings, e.g. on components. To avoid confusion with any other markings, it is advisable to affix the CE marking for the complete machine to the machine type plate, which should also contain the name and address of the manufacturer. 2-14

33 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.3 Directives Of the almost 30 active directives now available, only a small selection is relevant to the typical machine builder. Some directives may have a very long or bureaucratic title in addition to the directive number (e.g. 2006/42/EC). Variations can be seen in the last part of the directive number. This will contain EC, EU, EG, EWG or some other abbreviation, depending on the language area and issue date. As a result it is generally very difficult to name the directive. These long titles are often abbreviated separately, even though this can also lead to misunderstandings. Here is a list of some of the key directives with both their official title and their usual, though unofficial, abbreviated title: Directive Abbreviated title (unofficial) Official title 98/37/EC (Old) Machinery Directive Directive 98/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to machinery 2006/42/EC (New) Machinery Directive Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 May 2006 on machinery, and amending Directive 95/16/EC (recast) 2001/95/EC Product Safety Directive Directive 2001/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 3 December 2001 on general product safety 2004/108/EC EMC Directive Directive 2004/108/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and repealing Directive 89/336/EEC 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment Directive Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity 2003/10/EC Noise Directive Directive 2003/10/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 6 February 2003 on the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents (noise) 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive Directive 2006/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 89/686/EEC Personal Protective Equipment Directive Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to personal protective equipment The aim of the directives is to guarantee freedom of movement within the EU. The full texts of the directives are available from the EU. Of all these directives, only the Machinery Directive will be examined here in any further detail. However, the list of relevant standards will naturally refer to standards that relate to other directives. 2-15

34 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.3 Directives Machinery Directive 98 /37/EC and its successor 2006/42/EC have special significance in terms of the functional safety of machinery. This directive, generally known as the Machinery Directive, is concerned with the standardisation of European safety requirements on machinery Content The Machinery Directive covers the key aspects of machine safety. The contents of the Machinery Directive are as follows: Scope, placing on the market, freedom of movement Conformity assessment procedures CE marking Essential health and safety requirements Categories of machinery and the applicable conformity assessment procedures EC declaration of conformity and type-examination Requirements of notified bodies Validity The Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC replaced the previous version 98/37/EC with effect from There is no transition period Standards relating to the Machinery Directive At this point, it makes no sense to name all the standards that are listed under the Machinery Directive and are therefore considered as harmonised. As of Spring 2011, there were more than 700 standards listed directly. To then add all the standards that are relevant indirectly via the standards that are listed directly, would go far beyond the scope of this compendium. The following chapters will therefore concentrate on those standards for the Machinery Directive which are of general significance. 2-16

35 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Publishers and scope At European level, harmonisation of the legislation also triggered harmonisation of the standards. Traditionally, almost every country has one or more of its own standards institutes. There are also some international co-operations. This means that the same standard is published at different levels under different names. In most if not all cases, the generic name of the standard is continued and recognisable as part of the national standard name. More about that below International standards At international level, the most important publishers of engineering standards are probably the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), both of which are based in Geneva. While the IEC is primarily concerned with electrical and electronic issues, ISO deals mainly with mechanical issues. Well over 100 countries are currently members of the two organisations, which gives considerable weight to those standards developed by IEC and ISO. The EN standards are applied at European level. EN standards are normally developed through CEN and CENELEC as an EU initiative. As with IEC and ISO, CEN and CENELEC divide up the standards. CENELEC is responsible for electrical issues. Today, many standards are developed almost in a package as an IEC or ISO standard in co-operation with the EU via CEN and CENELEC. EN IEC or EN ISO standards are the result of these efforts National standards The diversity of national standards and standards institutes is almost unmanageable. In the EU at least, the aim is to produce the majority of standards directly as an EN standard, which is then reflected at national level, i.e. the EN standard is declared a national standard or the national standard is introduced as an EN standard. In Germany for example, the German Institute for Standardization ( Deutsche Institut für Normung - DIN) is responsible for publishing national standards. Today it s common practice for DIN standards to be developed and published directly in conjunction with CEN or CENELEC as DIN EN ISO or DIN EN. The only difference between these standards is usually the national preface to the EN, ISO or IEC standard. The same standard will come into effect at EU level as an EN ISO or EN IEC standard, while the identical German standard is called DIN EN ISO or DIN EN. In other European countries, the procedure is virtually the same except that a different institute publishes the standard. In Austria, this will be the Austrian Standards Institute (Österreichisches Normungsinstitut - ÖNorm), while Great Britain has the British Standard (BS). If an ISO standard becomes an EN standard, its title will be EN ISO. If it then becomes a DIN standard, its full title will be DIN EN ISO. The more local the institute, the further forward it appears in the name. One curious aside: If an IEC standard becomes an EN standard, the IEC name is dropped. IEC becomes the European standard EN IEC or the German DIN EN IEC While many countries such as China or Switzerland, for example, also follow the European procedure for a centralised standards institute, there are still some nasty surprises to be had elsewhere. In the USA, standards are published by ANSI, RSA and UL, among others. Sometimes there are co-operations such as ANSI ISO or UL IEC standards, but unfortunately there is no simple rule. 2-17

36 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN engineering safety standards There is no intention at this point to provide a complete list of the European engineering safety standards. Over 600 standards are listed as harmo- nised under the Machinery Directive alone. The following section addresses a selection of the general safety standards. They are explained in various degrees of detail, depending on the significance of the individual standard. Standard Harmonised Title EN 349:2008 Yes Safety of machinery Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body EN to -3:2008 Yes Safety of machinery Human body measurements EN 574:2008 Yes Safety of machinery Two-hand control devices Functional aspects Principles for design EN 953:2009 Yes Safety of machinery Safety of machinery. Guards. General requirements for the design and construction of fixed and movable guards EN to -4:2008 EN :2007 EN 1037:2008 identical to ISO 14118:2000 EN 1088:2007 equates to ISO 14119:2006 Yes No Yes Yes Safety of machinery Human physical performance Safety of machinery Prevention of unexpected start-up Safety of machinery Interlocking devices associated with guards. Principles for design and selection EN ISO 11161:2010 No Safety of machinery Integrated manufacturing systems Basic requirements EN ISO 12100:2010 replaces EN ISO and 2; EN ISO 14121; EN 292 Yes Safety of machinery General principles for design. Risk assessment and risk reduction EN 12453:2000 No Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates. Safety in use of power operated doors Requirements EN ISO :2009 Yes Safety of machinery Safety-related parts of control systems Part 1: General principles for design EN ISO :2008 Yes Safety of machinery Safety-related parts of control systems Part 2: Validation EN ISO 13855:2010 replaces EN 999 Yes Safety of machinery Positioning of safeguards with respect to the approach speeds of parts of the human body EN ISO 13857:2008 Yes Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs ISO 14119:2006 equates to EN 1088:2007 No Safety of machinery Interlocking devices associated with guards. Principles for design and selection 2-18

37 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO :2007 replaces EN 1050 ISO TR 23849:2010 identical to IEC TR :2009 Yes Safety of machinery Risk assessment Part 1: Principles No Guidance on the application of ISO and IEC in the design of safety-related control systems for machinery EN :2010 Yes Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General requirements EN :2009 EN :2008 EN :2007 EN :2003 EN :2006 EN :2001 EN :2003 EN :2007 EN :2008 EN Parts 1+2:2008 Yes No Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use. EMC requirements EN :2010 Yes Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 1: General requirements and tests IEC :2006 CLC/TS :2006: CLC/TS :2008 replaces EN :2003 EN Parts 1-7:2010 EN Parts 1-3:2004 No No No Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 2: Particular requirements for equipment using active optoelectronic protective devices (AOPDs) Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 3: Particular requirements for active optoelectronic protective devices responsive to diffuse reflection (AOPDDR) Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems No Functional safety Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector EN :2010 No Industrial communication networks Profiles Part 3: Functional safety fieldbuses General rules and profile definitions EN :2007 No Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional IEC/TS 62046:2008 No Safety of machinery Application of protective equipment to detect the presence of persons EN 62061:2010 Yes Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems IEC/TR 62685:2010 No Industrial communication networks Profiles Assessment guideline for safety devices using IEC functional safety communication profiles (FSCPs) NFPA 79:2009 No Industrial machinery 2-19

38 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Generic standards and design specifications EN ISO and EN ISO Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO 12100:2010 replaces EN ISO and 2; EN ISO Transition period until EN ISO :2009 replaces EN 292 EN ISO :2009 replaces EN 292 EN ISO :2007 replaces EN 1050 Yes Yes Yes Safety of machinery General principles for design. Risk assessment and risk reduction Safety of machinery - Basic concepts, general principles for design Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology Safety of machinery - Basic concepts, general principles for design Part 1: Technical principles Yes Safety of machinery - Risk assessment Part 1: Principles The standards EN ISO and -2 plus EN ISO essentially explain the principles and methods by which a risk assessment, risk analysis and risk minimisation should be carried out. EN ISO replaces its predecessor EN The two-part standard EN ISO replaces EN 292. All three standards are harmonised and so are particularly helpful for the European legal area. Elements within the diagram that have a dark yellow background are the areas covered by the user standards EN ISO and EN/IEC and are examined there in greater detail. Where possible the diagram refers to the corresponding clauses that cover the relevant aspect within the standards. Some points can certainly be found in several standards, but the level of detail generally varies. In 2011, EN ISO provided a further summary of EN and -2 plus EN This standard is identical in content to the named standards and simply summarises them within one document. The transition period in which the standards can coexist has been set until The diagram overleaf (see page 3-21) identifies the individual elements examined in these standards. It s worth noting that some aspects overlap between the standards and have therefore been merged within EN ISO Some diagrams are repeated within the standards, at least as extracts. Together these standards provide a good selection of the hazards, risk factors and design principles that need to be considered. 2-20

39 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Risk assessment Clause 5 Risk analysis START Determination of the limits of the machinery space, time, environmental conditions, use Clause 5.3 The following versions of the standards have been Fquoted: Replacement for* d EN ISO EN ISO * EN ISO * EN ISO EN ISO * EN/IEC * Hazard identification for all lifecycles and operating modes Clause 5.4 and Annex B Yes Separate for each risk Risk estimation Severity, possibility of avoidance, frequency, duration Clause 5.5 EN/IEC Annex A EN ISO Annex A (risk graph) Risk evaluation in accordance with C standards or risk estimation Clause 5.6 No Has the risk been adequately reduced? Clause 6 No Yes Documentation Clause 7 END Assess measures independently and consecutively Risk reduction Clause No Can the risk be reduced by inherently safe design measures? No Can the hazard be removed? Yes Yes Risk reduction by inherently safe design measures Clause 6.2 No Are other hazards generated? Is the intended risk reduction achieved? Yes Can the risk be reduced by guards and other safeguards? No Can the limits be specified again? Yes No Implementation of safety function SRCF/SRP/CS EN ISO /EN/IEC Risk reduction by safeguarding Implementation of complementary protective measure Clause 6.3 No Risk reduction by information for use Clause 6.4 Is the intended risk reduction achieved? Is the intended risk reduction achieved? Yes Yes Yes No Risk estimation and risk reduction in accordance with EN ISO

40 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards IEC/TR Test requirements and EMC Standard Harmonised Title IEC/TR 62685:2010 No Industrial communication networks Profiles Assessment guideline for safety devices using IEC functional safety communication profiles (FSCPs) IEC/TR was produced from the test requirements of the German BGIA document GS-ET-26 and covers the requirements of safety components within a safety function. It covers the issue of labelling and EMC as well as mechanical and climatic tests. This closes some of the gaps left by EN ISO and EN Overall the document is more relevant to safety component manufacturers than plant and machine builders. However, as the document contains a good comparison of EMC requirements, it may also be of interest to machine builders EN Safe fieldbuses Standard Harmonised Title EN :2010 No Industrial communication networks Profiles Part 3: Functional safety fieldbuses General rules and profile definitions The EN series of standards covers a whole range of safety enhancements for different fieldbus profiles, based on the specifications of EN These enhancements are handled as security profiles and describe the mechanisms and technical details of these profiles. For the average machine builder, at most the generic part of EN will be of interest, as this is the part that describes the general safety principles. The profile documents EN x are mainly intended for device manufacturers who wish to build their own safety devices in accordance with one of the published profiles. In this case, it makes sense to work in cooperation with the relevant user groups behind these profiles, as they will be familiar with the basic profiles described in the series EN and -2, as well as EN A complete profile consisting of the relevant parts of EN and EN will contain between 500 and 2,000 pages. All the profiles together amount to around 10,000 pages. 2-22

41 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN ISO Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO :2008 Yes Safety of machinery Safety-related parts of control systems Part 1: General principles for design Content EN ISO addresses the issue of risk assessment using a risk graph and also deals with the validation of safety functions based on structural and statistical methods. The objective is to establish the suitability of safety measures to reduce risks. In terms of content, therefore, it is almost on a par with EN The work involved in making the calculations required under this standard can be reduced considerably if appropriate software is used. Calculation tools such as the Safety Calculator PAScal are available as free software: pascal/index.de.jsp Scope EN ISO is a generic standard for functional safety. It has been adopted at ISO level and within the EU is harmonised to the Machinery Directive. It therefore provides presumption of conformity within the EU. The scope is given as the electrical, electronic, programmable electronic, mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic safety of machinery. Risk assessment/ risk analysis Risks are assessed in EN ISO with the aid of a risk graph. The assessed criteria include severity of injury, frequency of exposure to the risk and the possibility of avoiding the risk. The outcome of the assessment is a required performance level (PL r ) for the individual risks. In subsequent stages of the risk assessment, the levels determined using the risk graph are aligned with the selected risk reduction measures. For each classified risk, one or more measures must be applied to prevent the risk from occurring or to sufficiently reduce the risk. The quality of the measure in the performance level must at least correspond to the level determined for the respective risk. PAScal Safety Calculator 2-23

42 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Determination of the required performance level PL r Just 3 parameters need to be examined to assess the performance level (PL): Severity of injury Slight (normally reversible injury) S 1 Serious (normally irreversible injury S 2 including death) Frequency and/or exposure to a hazard Seldom to less often and/or exposure time is short F 1 Frequent to continuous and/or exposure time is long Possibility of avoiding the hazard Possible under specific conditions P 1 Scarcely possible P 2 S F F 2 P Assessment of the risk begins at the starting point on the graph and then follows the corresponding path, depending on the risk classification. The required performance level PL r a, b, c, d or e is determined once all the parameters have been assessed. Assessing the implementation/examining the system EN ISO works on the assumption that there is no such thing as a safe device. Devices only become suitable through an appropriate design for use in applications with increased requirements. As part of an assessment each device is given a PL, which describes its suitability. Simple components can also be described via their MTTF d (Mean time to dangerous failure) or B10 d value (Mean number of cycles until 10% of the components fail dangerously). The following considerations examine how the failure of devices or their components affects the safety of the system, how likely these failures are to occur and how to calculate the PL. The required performance level PL r is calculated using the following graph and the classification of the individual parameters. Low contribution to risk reduction Starting point for evaluation of safety function's contribution to risk reduction Required performance level PLr High contribution to risk reduction Risk graph in accordance with EN ISO

43 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Determination of common cause failures CCF factor The CCF factor is determined through a combination of several individual assessments. One of the first key parameters to examine is the system architecture. Systematic effects in particular need to be assessed, such as the failure of several components due to a common cause. The competence and experience of the developers are also evaluated, along with the analysis procedures. An evaluation scale is used, on which a score of between 0 and 100% can be achieved. Requirement Score Physical separation of safety 15 % circuits and other circuits Diversity (use of diverse 20 % technologies) Design/application/experience 20 % Assessment/analysis 5 % Competence/training 5 % Environmental influences 35 % (EMC, temperature,...) With EN ISO , the effect of the CCF is deemed acceptable if the total score achieved is > 65%. PL assessment IEC ISO uses the diagnostic coverage (DC), system category and the system s MTTF d to determine the PL (performance level). The first value to be determined is the DC. This depends on λ DD (failure rate of detected dangerous failures) and λ Dtotal (failure rate of total dangerous failures). In the simplest case this is expressed as: DC = Σλ DD /Σλ Dtotal On complex systems, an average DC avg is calculated: DC1 DC2 DCN MTTFd1 MTTFd2 MTTFdN DC = avg MTTF d1 MTTF... + d2 MTTF dn The diagnostic coverage is determined from this DC value: Diagnostic coverage Range of DC None DC < 60 % Low 60 % DC < 90 % Medium 90 % DC < 99 % High 99 % DC With homogenous or single-channel systems, the MTTF d value can be established approximately as the sum of the reciprocal values of the individual components, corresponding to the MTTF d value of a single channel: 1 = MTTF d Σ N i=1 1 MTTF d,i 2-25

44 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards With dual-channel, diverse systems, the MTTF d value of both channels needs to be calculated separately. Both values are included in the calculation of the combined MTTF d, using the formula below. Denotation of MTTF d Low Medium High MTTF d 3 years MTTF d < 10 years 10 years MTTF d < 30 years 30 years MTTF d < 100 years MTTF d = 2 1 MTTF 3 d, C1 +MTTF d, C MTTF d, C1 MTTF d, C2 Here too, a table is used to derive a qualitative evaluation from the numeric value, which is then used in subsequent considerations. The system architecture can be divided into five different categories. The achieved category depends not only on the architecture, but on the components used and diagnostic coverages. The graphic below illustrates some classifications by way of example. Category B, 1 Category 2 OSSD1 OSSD2 Category 3 Category 4 Instantaneous Delayed Examples for the categories in accordance with EN ISO

45 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards In a final assessment stage, a graphic is used to assign the PL based on the recently calculated values a 10-5 b 3x10-6 c 10-6 d 10-7 e 10-8 PFH/h -1 MTTF oc = low, MTTF oc = medium, MTTF oc = high Cat B DC avg = none Cat 1 DC avg = none Cat 2 DC avg = low Performance Level Cat 2 DC avg = med. Cat 3 DC avg = low Cat 3 DC avg = med. Graph to determine the PL in accordance with EN ISO years 3 years 10 years 30 years Cat 4 DC avg = high The most practical approach is to select the column for Category and DC first. Then choose the relevant MTTF d range from the bar. The PL result can now be read from the left-hand scale. In most cases, some interpretation will still be required, as often there is no clear relationship between the MTTF d range and the PL. The final step is to compare the required PL r level from the risk assessment with the achieved PL. If the achieved PL is greater than or equal to the required PL r, the requirement for the implementation is considered to have been met. Transition periods EN and ISO :1999 to EN ISO :2008 Since , EN has ceased to be listed in the Official Journal of the EU and as such is no longer regarded as harmonised. It does remain significant, however. This is because it is named as the reference of the superseded standard in its successor, EN ISO :2008. The corresponding publication establishes that presumption of conformity for EN shall apply until After that date, presumption of conformity shall no longer apply for EN At ISO level the current situation is that ISO :1999 (identical content to EN 954-1) was replaced by ISO :2006 with immediate effect. So ISO ceased to apply in There is no transition period. C standard refers to EN So what happens now to the C standards, also known as product standards, which refer to EN or ISO :1999 and require a particular category in accordance with EN or ISO :1999 for specific safety functions, for example? CEN and EN have the task of resolving such problems quickly and of rewording these standards so that they refer to EN ISO However, the situation has arisen in which a series of C standards have not been adapted within the stipulated time. At the time of going to print (Q2/2011), around 160 of more than 600 harmonised standards had still not been updated. As a result, there are valid standards that refer to the withdrawn standards EN or ISO :1999. References to ISO :1999 are almost worthless as they have no direct validity in the EU. The usual procedure of referring to the successor of EN will fail in this case because the way in which safety functions are considered has changed substantially and the categories required for implementation in EN ISO :2006 mean something different. What does that mean for someone who needs to certify a machine for which such a C standard exists? In this case, EN and ISO :1999 will still be applicable, through the back door as it were. 2-27

46 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Irrespective of this situation, the advice would be to carry out a separate risk assessment and certification in accordance with EN ISO :2008. A helpful procedure is to estimate the risks described in the C standard and document the parameters S, F and P, which are present in both standards. This allows the relevant risk graphs to be used to carry out a clear risk classification for the two old standards as well as for EN ISO :2008. If the results from the assessment in accordance with EN or ISO :1999 correspond to those of the C standard, this can be used to confirm the corresponding classification in accordance with EN ISO :2008. EN despite the C standard referring to EN ISO Even if the relevant C standard for a product already refers to :2008, it is still technically possible to apply EN Ultimately, however, the possibility of EN not being recognised as the state of the art in any legal dispute cannot be excluded, because it already has a successor standard (EN ISO :2008). The state of the art is a basic requirement for the safety-related development of products in accordance with the Machinery Directive; as a result, the products concerned would not comply with the Machinery Directive, which would have direct consequences for product liability. What does that mean for someone who needs to certify a machine for which such a C standard exists? In this case, EN and ISO :1999 will still be applicable, through the back door as it were, even after Irrespective of this situation, after this date the machine builder is still free to carry out his own risk assessment and certification in accordance with EN ISO :2006. A helpful procedure would be to estimate the risks described in the C standard and document the parameters S, F and P, which are present in both standards. This would allow the relevant risk graphs to be used to carry out a clear risk classification for the two old standards as well as for EN ISO :2006. If the results from the assessment in accordance with EN954-1 or ISO :1999 correspond to those of the C standard, this can be used to confirm the corresponding classification in accordance with EN ISO :

47 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN ISO Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO 13855:2010 replaces EN 999 Yes Safety of machinery Positioning of safeguards with respect to the approach speeds of parts of the human body EN ISO primarily defines human approach speeds. These approach speeds need to be considered when designing safety measures and selecting the appropriate sensor technology. Different speeds and sizes are defined, depending on the direction and type of approach. Even an indirect approach is considered. The problem regarding measurement of the overall stopping performance is considered alongside the measurement of safety distances. Clear specifications are provided as to how the overall stopping performance should and should not be measured. Safeguards prevent operators from approaching hazardous movements EN ISO Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO 13857:2008 Yes Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs EN ISO was first published in 2008 and examines the safety distances required to prevent hazard zones being reached by the upper and lower limbs. It is worth stressing that this standard makes it clear that different anthropometric data (size, length of limbs ) may apply for other populations or groups (e.g. Asian countries, Scandinavia, children) and that this could give rise to other risks. Application of this standard may therefore be restricted, particularly in the public domain or when exporting to other countries. 2-29

48 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector Standard Harmonised Title EN Parts 1-3:2005 No Functional safety Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector The EN series of standards covers safety issues concerning plants and systems in the process industry. As a sector standard of EN 61508, the EN series is a sister standard of EN This is reflected in the similar observations and mathematical principles contained in the 3 standards. However, an important difference for most end users, as well as component manufacturers, is the differentiation between the demand modes. High demand modes have always been assumed in engineering, but EN also recognises a low demand mode. The key characteristic for this mode is that a safety function is demanded (operated) less than once per year. As a result, EN introduced a PFD (Probability of failure on low demand) alongside the PFH (Probability of failure on high demand) and SILcl. It is particularly worth noting that the SILcl for Low Demand Mode may vary from the SILcl for High Demand Mode EN Standard Harmonised Title EN 62061:2005 Yes Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems Content EN addresses the issue of risk assessment using a risk graph, which in this case is in the form of a table. It also deals with the validation of safety functions based on structural and statistical methods. As with EN ISO , the objective is to establish the suitability of safety measures to reduce risks. As with EN , there is considerable work involved in making the calculations required under this standard. This can be reduced considerably if appropriate software is used, such as the Safety Calculator PAScal. products/software/tools/f/pascal/index.de.jsp Scope EN IEC is one of the generic standards for functional safety. It has been adopted at IEC level and in the EU is harmonised as a standard within the Machinery Directive. It therefore provides presumption of conformity within the EU. The scope is given as the electrical, electronic and programmable electronic safety of machinery. It is not intended for mechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic energy sources. The application of EN ISO is advisable in these cases. 2-30

49 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Risk assessment/ risk analysis Risks are assessed in IEC using tables and risk graphs. The evaluations made for each individual risk include the severity of potential injuries, the frequency and duration of exposure, the possibility of avoidance and the probability of occurrence. The outcome of the assessment is the required safety integrity level (SIL) for the individual risks. In subsequent stages of the risk assessment, the levels determined using the risk graph are aligned with the selected risk reduction measures. For each classified risk, one or more measures must be applied to prevent the risk from occurring or to sufficiently reduce the risk. The SIL for that measure must at least correspond to the required SIL, determined on the basis of the risk. Determination of the required SIL According to EN IEC there are four different parameters to assess. Each parameter is awarded points in accordance with the scores in the following tables. SIL classification, based on the above entries, is made using the table below, in which the consequences are compared with the Class Cl. Class Cl is the sum total of the scores for frequency, duration, probability and avoidance. Areas marked with OM indicate that the standard recommends the use of other measures in this case. Frequency and duration of exposure Fr < 10 min Fr 10 min 1 hour 5 5 > 1 hour 1 day 5 4 > 1 day 2 weeks 4 3 > 2 weeks 1 year 3 2 > 1 year 2 1 Probability of Pr occurrence Very high 5 Likely 4 Possible 3 Rarely 2 Negligible 1 Avoidance Av Impossible 5 Rarely 3 Probable 1 Consequences Class Cl = Fr+Pr+Av S Death, losing an eye or arm 4 SIL 2 SIL 2 SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 3 Permanent, losing fingers 3 OM SIL 1 SIL 2 SIL 3 Reversible, medical attention 2 OM SIL 1 SIL 2 Reversible, first aid 1 OM SIL 1 OM = other measures recommended Risk graph in accordance with EN IEC

50 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Assessing the implementation/examining the system The principle assumption is that there is no such thing as a safe device. Devices only become suitable through an appropriate design for use in applications with increased requirements. As part of an assessment each device is given an SIL, which describes its suitability. Simple components can also be described via their MTTF d or B10 d value. The following considerations examine how the failure of devices or their components affect the safety of the system, how likely these failures are to occur and how to calculate the SIL. Determination of common cause failure CCF factor The CCF factor is determined through a combination of several individual assessments. One of the first key parameters to examine is the system architecture. Systematic effects in particular need to be assessed, such as the failure of several components due to a common cause. The competence and experience of the developer are also evaluated, along with the analysis procedures. An evaluation scale is used, on which there are 100 points to be assigned. Requirement Score Physical separation of safety circuits 20 and other circuits Diversity 38 (use of diverse technologies) Design/application/experience 2 Assessment/analysis 18 Competence/training 4 Environmental influences 18 (EMC, temperature,...) The next step is to determine the β factor (beta), based on the points achieved using the following table. β factor Common cause factor < % (0.1) % (0.05) % (0.02) % (0.01) 2-32

51 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards SIL assessment In EN 62061, the maximum achievable SIL is determined via the dependency between the hardware fault tolerance and the safe failure fraction (SFF). The SFF is calculated by assessing all possible types of component failures and establishing whether each of these failures results in a safe or unsafe condition. The result provides the system s SFF. The structural analysis also indicates whether there is any fault tolerance. If the fault tolerance is N, the occurrence of N+1 faults can lead to the loss of the safety function. The following table shows the maximum potential SIL, based on the fault tolerance and SFF. Safe failure fraction (SFF) Hardware fault tolerance 0 Hardware fault tolerance 1 Hardware fault tolerance 2 < 60 % Not permitted SIL 1 SIL 2 60 % < 90 % SIL 1 SIL 2 SIL 3 90 % < 99 % SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 3 99 % SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 3 The failure rates λ of the individual components and their λ D fraction (dangerous failures) can be determined via PFH D formulas, which are dependent on architecture. These formulas can be extremely complex, but always have the format: The combined consideration of hardware, fault tolerance, category, DC, PFH D and SFF provides the following SIL assignment. All conditions must always be met. If one single condition is not met, the SIL has not been achieved. PFH D = f (λ, β, T, T, DC ) Di 1 2 i where T 2 Diagnostic test interval T 1 Minimum test interval and mission time PFH D Cat. SFF Hardware DC SIL fault tolerance % 0 60 % 1 2x % 1 60 % 1 2x % 1 60 % 2 3x % 2 60 % 3 3x > 90 % 1 > 90 % 3 The final step is to compare the required SIL from the risk assessment with the achieved SIL. If the achieved SIL is greater than or equal to the required SIL, the requirement for the implementation is considered to have been met. 2-33

52 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN This standard has been withdrawn and replaced by EN ISO See page 3-24 for details of the transition periods EN Standard Harmonised Title EN :2007 Yes Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1: General requirements The harmonised standard EN considers the electrical safety of non-hand-guided machinery with voltages up to 1000 VDC and 1500 VAC. Its scope is therefore such that there are very few industrial machines that it does not affect EN Standard Harmonised Title EN :2010 EN :2010 EN :2010 EN :2010 EN :2010 EN :2010 EN :2010 No Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems EN is the key standard dealing with the functional safety of control systems. It has 7 parts in total and all together contains around 1000 pages of text. It s important to note that EN has not been harmonised. Only its sector standard EN can claim harmonisation. The whole EN standards package was completely revised in 2010 and Edition 2 is now available. A key component of EN is the examination of the complete lifecycle from a safety perspective (in Part 1), with detailed requirements of the procedure and the content of the individual steps; it s essential to both machine builders and safety component manufacturers alike. This standard is also focused on the design of electrical systems and their corresponding software. However, the standard is to be generally expanded and will also apply for all other systems (mechanics, pneumatics, hydraulics). Manufacturers of safety components such as safety relays, programmable safety systems and safety sensor/actuator technology are likely to derive the most benefit from this standard. Overall, when it comes to defining safety levels, end users or system integrators are better advised to use the much less complex EN or EN ISO , rather than EN Another sector standard of EN is EN 61511, which is applicable for the process industry sector. 2-34

53 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Technical requirements Other requirements PART 1 Development of the overall safety requirements (concept, scope, definition, hazard and risk analysis) 7.1 to 7.5 Realisation phase for E/E/PE safety-related systems PART 1 Allocation of the safety requirements to the E/E/PE safety-related systems 7.6 PART 1 Specification of the safety requirements for safety-related E/E/PE systems 7.10 PART 2 PART 3 PART 1 Realisation phase for safety-related software Installation, commissioning and safety validation of E/E/PE safety-related systems 7.13 and 7.14 PART 5 Examples of methods for the determination of safety integrity levels PART 6 Guidelines on the application of Parts 2 and 3 PART 7 Overview of techniques and measures PART 4 Definitions and abbreviations PART 1 Documentation Clause 5 and Annex A PART 1 Management of functional safety Clause 6 PART 1 Functional safety assessment Clause 8 PART 1 Operation and maintenance, modification and retrofit, decommissioning or disposal of E/E/PE safety-related systems 7.15 to 7.17 Extract from DIN EN , overall framework of the safety assessment in accordance with EN Overall framework of the IEC series of standards. 2-35

54 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards 1 Concept 2 Overall scope definition 3 Hazard and risk analysis 4 Overall safety requirements 5 Overall safety requirements allocation 9 E/E/PE system safety requirements specification 10 E/E/PE safety-related systems Realisation (see E/E/PE system safety lifecycle) 11 Other risk reduction measures Specification and realisation Overall planning 8 Overall installation and commissioning planning 12 Overall installation and commissioning 7 Overall safety validation planning 13 Overall safety validation Back to appropriate overall safety lifecycle phase 6 Overall operation and maintenance planning 14 Overall operation, maintenance and repair 15 Overall modification and retrofit 16 Decommissioning or disposal Overall safety lifecycle in accordance with EN

55 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN Standard Harmonised Title EN Part 1 and 2:2008 No Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use EMC requirements With the release of EN and EN , since 2008 there have been two standards providing information on immunity requirements in respect of the EMC level on safety devices. Both parts have been specified with different immunity requirements. Part EN is the general section with more stringent requirements. This part was drawn up with a particular view towards mechanical engineering. In contrast, part EN was written with a view towards the process industry and the immunity requirements are significantly lower. In engineering, therefore, it should always be ensured that the test requirements in accordance with EN are met as a minimum. As the origin of both these standards is still very recent and there are no forerunners to refer back to, it will still be some time before they are reflected in the relevant device certificates. In general, it should be noted that product or sector standards also set EMC requirements, but these are mostly below the requirements stated in EN

56 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Product standards EN 1088 and ISO Standard Harmonised Title EN1088:2007 ISO 14119:2006 Yes No Safety of machinery Interlocking devices associated with guards. Principles for design and selection EN 1088 was published back in The 2007 amendment is just a first step towards the new version and unification with ISO The purpose of the standard is to specify exact requirements to improve provisions for reducing the ability of the machine operator to defeat safety equipment. Investigations have shown that operators often attempt to defeat the safety function of an interlocking guard by defeating the interlock. The ability to defeat safety equipment can mainly be attributed to deficiencies in the machine design EN and IEC/TS Standard Harmonised Title IEC/TS 62046:2008 No Safety of machinery Application of protective equipment to detect the presence of persons EN :2010 Yes Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 1: General requirements and tests IEC :2006 CLC/TS :2006: CLC/TS :2008: replaces EN :2003 No No Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 2: Particular requirements for equipment using active optoelectronic protective devices (AOPDs) Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 2: Particular requirements for active optoelectronic protective devices responsive to diffuse reflection (AOPDDR) While the series describes product-specific requirements of electrosensitive protective equipment, IEC/TS focuses on the selection and measurement of electrosensitive protective equipment such as light beam devices, light grids or scanners. As such, it is one of the key standards for machine builders when it comes to designing machine access areas and safeguarding material channels. The EN series of standards considers electrosensitive protective equipment. This includes devices such as light grids, laser scanners, light beam devices, safe camera systems and other sensors, which can all be used for non-contact protection. As EN is a product standard for safety components, it is only relevant for the typical user if the safety components he has used are intended to conform to these standards. 2-38

57 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards EN Standard Harmonised Title EN :2007 No Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional The non-harmonised EN is aimed at both drive manufacturers and users. It deals with the issue of drive-based safety, but without specifying any requirements regarding safety-related suitability. No safety level is established, nor is there any definite hazard or risk evaluation. Instead, the standard describes mechanisms and safety functions of drives in an application environment, and how these are verified and planned within the drive s lifecycle. Technologically, the standard is based on EN 61508, even though proximity with EN ISO might have been anticipated, given the ever-present mechanical aspect of the drives. Manufacturers of safe drives focus on EN

58 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.4 Standards Application standards EN ISO Integrated manufacturing systems Standard Harmonised Title EN ISO 11161:2010 No Safety of machinery Integrated manufacturing systems Basic requirements This standard deals with the safety aspects when assembling machines and components into a manufacturing system (IMS). It does not deal with the requirements of the individual components and machines. The standard is of particular interest to operators and system integrators who operate or design machine pools and plants incorporating machines and components. This standard should be applied in close co-operation with EN ISO NFPA 79 Standard Harmonised Title NFPA 79:2008 No Industrial machinery This standard is mainly important for the US market, though it may also be applied in Asia. The standard is concerned with the safe design, operation and inspection of industrial machinery. 2-40

59 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.5 International comparison of standards, directives and laws Most countries have binding regulations for making plant and machinery safe. After all, safe machinery plays a part in increasing the motivation and productivity of staff. The type of regulation varies from region to region and is designed to suit the respective legal and cultural environment, ranging from mandatory laws to recommendations of a non-binding nature. Even the level of jurisdiction to guarantee compliance varies enormously. Self certification is enough in some countries, while others have commercial institutions which carry out inspections in accordance with their own rules. In other parts of the world, certification is carried out by stateauthorised institutions. This safety compendium is mainly concerned with European standards, directives and laws. However, the following section provides a brief overview of the situation in other parts of the world Directives and laws in America North America USA The legal basis in the USA can be regarded as a mix of product standards, fire codes (NFPA), electrical codes (NEC) and national laws. Local government bodies have the authority to monitor that these codes are being enforced and implemented. People there are mainly familiar with two types of standards: OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) and ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Government bodies publish OSHA standards and compliance is mandatory. OSHA standards are comparable with European directives, although OSHA is more concerned with describing technical property requirements than with abstract requirements. ANSI standards, on the other hand, are developed by private organisations and their application is generally not absolutely mandatory. However, ANSI standards are still included in contracts and OSHA frequently adopts ANSI standards. You can also still come across the NFPA (National Fire Protection Association), which developed NFPA 79 as a counterpart to EN , for example. Canada Although the situation in Canada is comparable to that of the USA, there are a few differences. The central standards organisation in Canada is the CSA (Canadian Standards Association). ANSI and NFPA are much less important in Canada. However, it s important to note that a considerable number of standards are published in identical form by CSA and ANSI, making portability between the two states somewhat easier. The CSA and its standards have no legal character in Canada. On the legal side there is CCOHS (Canadian Centre for Occupational Health and Safety), which is the Canadian equivalent of OSHA. This organisation and its regional branches establish the formal reference between the standards and the law. However, as in the USA, this is a much more individual approach than that taken by the European directives. 2-41

60 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.5 International comparison of standards, directives and laws South America Argentina The situation in Argentina largely corresponds to that of Brazil; indeed, the Argentine Institute of Standardization and Certification (IRAM) has placed advertisements advising companies to adopt the standards at national level. However, only a few companies from the oil and gas industry implement them, even in part. Chile The Chilean National Standards Institute (INN) has adopted some of the standards from the IEC field of electrical engineering. However, a study of IEC 61508, IEC or IEC is neither being developed, nor is its implementation planned Directives and laws in Asia Russia and the CIS states Brazil The Brazilian Technical Standards Association (ABNT) has incorporated the standards ABNT NBR/IEC and ABNT NBR/IEC The possibility of harmonising the standards IEC 61508, IEC or IEC has not yet been analysed. Due to increasing globalisation and market requirements, the larger Brazilian companies are independently changing to ISO/IEC standards before ABNT has the chance to incorporate them into Brazilian legislation. Multinational companies or businesses working in the process industry, such as in oil and gas, often apply international ISO/ IEC standards such as IEC Russia and the CIS states have implemented GOST-R certification for some years now. Under this procedure, technical devices included on a specific product list must undergo a certain certification process. A European notified body performs a type-examination on machinery and any corresponding technical accessories. The Russian-based approvals body generally recognises this examination. From a safety point of view, therefore, the same requirements apply as in Europe. 2-42

61 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.5 International comparison of standards, directives and laws Japan China The Industrial Safety and Health Law places demands on design issues relating to certain machinery (crane, lift etc.). The law also states that the machine operator is responsible for carrying out risk analyses. He also has to ensure safety in the workplace. It is assumed that the machine operator will ask the machine manufacturer to issue a risk analysis report at the time of purchase and that the machine is designed safely. The law also contains requirements for pressure vessels, personal protective equipment, packaging machines for the food industry and machines that are moved on the public highway. China has introduced CCC certification. Similar to the position in Russia, technical products are subject to mandatory certification through a national approvals body, and production sites are also inspected. If a technical device falls with the scope of the product list, which is subdivided into 19 categories, certification is mandatory. In all other cases, it is necessary to supply a type of declaration of no objection from a national notified body. Japan adopts most of the IEC and ISO standards as JIS standards (Japan Industrial Standards); however, the Industrial Safety and Health Law does not yet refer to each of these standards. There are plans to publish a supplementary law to this one, which will look specifically at the issue of performing risk analyses. It is anticipated that this law will refer to JIS (or ISO). 2-43

62 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.5 International comparison of standards, directives and laws Directives and laws in Oceania Australia in case of any action relating to neglect of duty of care. Failure to comply, on the other hand, may have serious legal consequences. Many Australian standards are based on international standards, particularly: Standards issued by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) European standards (EN) British standards (BS, nowadays often in the form of combined BS/EN standards) or Standards issued by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) In Australia, states and territories have the responsibility of drafting and implementing safety laws. Fortunately the individual laws on industrial safety and their requirements are very similar. The relevant legislation is based on the Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Act. This defines the obligations and duty of care of people with various responsibilities. Numerous regulations and codes of practice for the various safety areas fall under the state OHS legislation. These regulations are legally binding. Although the codes of practice are not generally legally binding, they are frequently consulted as a benchmark in the respective legal system, whenever it is necessary to assess whether sufficient measures have been taken to design a safe workplace. For this reason, failure to comply with codes of practice can have very serious consequences. As well as referring to the codes of practice, regulations also sometimes refer to the Australian standards drafted by an independent organisation called Standards Australia. However, with a few notable exceptions, Australian standards are not legally binding, although courts frequently consult them in order to assess the measures that have been taken to reduce risks. The most important machinery safety standard in Australia is AS4024.1, for example. Although compliance is not strictly mandatory, it does represent an excellent defence Standards Australia s official policy is to adopt international standards (ISO or IEC) where possible in the interests of international alignment. In contrast, US American standards (ANSI standards) rarely correspond to Australian, ISO or EN standards and are of little relevance in Australia Summary The comparison illustrates key differences in the way standards are applied. It makes it clear that knowledge of the respective national circumstances is indispensable when exporting. In particular, it illustrates the importance of European standards: In most countries, certification in accordance with IEC, EN and even ISO standards is now hugely important, as these standards are often used as the basis for national regulations. It doesn t automatically mean that certificates will be accepted, but certification in these countries will be considerably easier if certification to European standards is in place. Validation (from lat. validus: strong, powerful, healthy) describes the testing of a plan or solution approach with regard to the task it is intended to fulfil and the associated solution to a problem. Verification describes the procedure for testing a plan or solution approach with regard to a corresponding specification. Together, both processes are used to demonstrate the suitability of a specific solution approach. 2-44

63 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation In mechanical engineering, a validation process must provide evidence that the plant or machine meets the requirements of its specific intended use. The process of verification also examines the functionality of the technical equipment and the safetyrelated parts of control systems, thereby confirming that they fulfil their functions safely, in accordance with the specification. Documentation of the results and solutions from the verification and validation process ensures that the intended target has actually been achieved. With its basic terminology, general principles for design, procedures for evaluating risks (analysis and estimation), plus principles of risk assessment and risk reduction, the harmonised standard EN ISO defines important practices for safety-related systems and safety-related parts of plant and machine control systems. Other harmonised standards use this essential standard as a basis for describing the design, structure and integration of safety-related parts of control systems and safeguards: standards such as EN ISO /-2 and EN with its sector standard EN (the origin of validation). In contrast to EN 62061, EN ISO /-2 is not restricted to electrical systems but can also be applied to mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic systems. Both standards (EN ISO /-2 and EN 62061) specify essential requirements for the design and implementation of safety-related control systems on machinery and are successors to EN 954-1, which is no longer relevant. In the application of EN ISO /EN 62061, there are a number of differences in the design and implementation of safety-related parts of control systems and their subsequent assessment within the validation process. EN ISO /-2 Mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic systems EN Electrical, electronic, programmable systems EN Userprogrammable systems Safety components and system programming Structure and overlap of generic and sector standards. 2-45

64 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Verification of safety functions in accordance with EN ISO /2 Required characteristic data: PL, Category, MTTF d, DC, CCF, B10 d The stipulated requirements form the basis for the design and implementation of the safety function (selection of components and architecture). The planned components are grouped into subsystems and the achievable performance level (PL) is defined. Verification of the planned safety function: Achieved PL >= PL r. The validation process confirms the conformity of the configuration and function of the safety-related parts of control systems within the overall specification of the plant and machinery. Note: Guidance on how to implement a validation process and validation tools for various technical systems can be found in EN ISO Verification of safety functions in accordance with EN Required characteristic data: PFH, SIL, MTTF d, DC, CCF, B10 d. The implementation of safety functions is designed on the basis of the formulated requirements. This involves the selection of appropriate components and the development of a coherent architecture. The planned components are grouped into subsystems and are the basis for determining the safety integrity level (SIL). Verification of the planned safety function: Achieved SIL >= Required SIL. PL (EN ISO ) SIL (EN 62061) a - b 1 c 1 d 2 e 3-4 The verification of safety-related parts of control systems must demonstrate that the requirements and specifications have been met in accordance with the applied standard and the safety-related specification. These requirements refer specifically to the properties of a safety function, as defined in accordance with the risk assessment the standard-compliant architecture of the category defined for the safety function. Verification of the safety-related parts of control systems consists of a thorough analysis and, if necessary, the carrying out of additional (function) tests and fault simulations. It is advisable to start the analysis right at the beginning of the design process so that any faults and/or problems can be identified early and dealt with accordingly. The way in which the analysis and tests are carried out will depend on the size and complexity of the control system and the way it is integrated within the plant or machine. It makes sense, therefore, to carry out certain analyses and tests only once the control system has been developed to a certain level. An independent person or body should be commissioned to ensure that the analysis is independent. However, this does not necessarily mean that a third-party needs to be involved. To carry out the validation, a validation plan must first be produced to establish the scope of the analysis and tests. The exact scope and balance between the two processes always depends on the technology that is used and its complexity. The diagram overleaf provides a schematic overview of the validation process. Comparison chart: performance level (PL) and safety integrity level (SIL). 2-46

65 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Design in accordance with EN (4) Start Fault lists (3.2, 3.3) Validation plan (3.4) Validation principles (3.1) Documents (3.5) Analysis (4) NO Fault exclusion (Annexes A-D) Is the analysis sufficient? NO Testing (5) YES Is testing complete? Safety functions Test SF under fault conditions (3.6) YES Performance Level: Category MTTF d DC CCF Systematic failures Software Combination/ integration Validation report All parts tested successfully? NO Modification End Validation plan in accordance with EN ISO General information about the validation plan The validation plan must describe all the requirements for carrying out the validation of the specified safety functions and their categories. The validation plan must also provide information about the means to be employed to carry out the validation. Depending on the complexity of the control system or machine that is to be tested, the validation plan must provide information about: the requirements for carrying out the validation plan the operational and environmental conditions the basic and well-tried safety principles the well-tried components the fault assumptions and fault exclusions the analyses and tests to be applied The validation plan also contains all the validation documents. 2-47

66 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Validation by analysis The validation of safety-related parts of control systems is primarily carried out by analysis. Evidence must be provided to show that all the required properties of a safety function [SRCF] are actually present. The following factors are included in the analysis: the hazards identified in association with the machine the reliability the system structure the non-quantifiable, qualitative aspects which affect system behaviour deterministic arguments such as empirical values, quality features and failure rates Top-down / Bottom-up analysis techniques There are two different techniques to choose from when selecting the analysis technique: the deductive top-down technique and the inductive bottom-up technique. The deductive top-down technique can be applied in the form of a fault tree analysis or event tree analysis. Examples of the inductive bottom-up technique are the failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) and failure modes, effects and criticality analysis (FMECA) Validation by testing When validation by analysis is not sufficient to demonstrate the achievement of a specified safety function, further tests will be needed to complete the validation. As many control systems and their requirements are extremely complex, further tests need to be carried out in the majority of cases. The test results must be documented in a way that is traceable; the test records must include the following as a minimum: the name of the person and/or body undertaking the test the environmental conditions at the time of the test the test procedures and equipment used To demonstrate that the target and defined safety objective has actually been achieved, the test results are then compared with the specifications from the test plan Verification of safety functions An important part of validation is verification that the safety functions comply with the intended specifications, functions, categories and architectures. It is important to validate the specified safety functions in all of the plant/machine s operating modes. Alongside the basic validation of each safety function, the validation of the PL and/or SIL value within the safety function also has a key role to play. The following steps are required when verifying the safety function that a PL has achieved: Validation of the category Validation of the MTTF d values Validation of the DC values Validation of the measures against common cause failures/ccf Validation of the measures against systematic faults In practice the test requires a test plan, which must include the following: the test specifications the expected results the chronology of the individual tests

67 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation PL calculation in accordance with the result from the risk assessment Recalculate PL Determine which SF required Is the PL PL (required)? NO YES For each safety function Have the requirements been met? NO YES If necessary, functional check of safety function on the machine Have all SF been fully analysed? YES NO Verification and validation flowchart (source: Pilz training materials) The validation of safety functions is a really complex process and so it is advisable in this case to use a software tool (e.g. PAScal), which can help you to calculate the planned and/or implemented safety functions. Based on the safety-related characteristic values of the planned/employed components, these calculation tools validate the values that have been achieved, including the required/demanded default values PL r or SIL. The advantage of software-based tools is that they guide you step-bystep through the individual stages involved in validating safety functions. The option within the tool for graphic modelling of safety functions gives the tester additional security in his calculations and helps to make the results more traceable

68 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Validation of software The provisions in the standards EN and EN ISO /-2 allow the development of safety-related software in the machine sector for all performance levels and safety integrity levels. As a result, software assumes a high level of responsibility and largely determines the quality of the safety function to be implemented. It is therefore of the utmost importance that the software created is clear, legible and can be tested and maintained. To guarantee the quality of the software, it is also subjected to a validation process during development. The basic principles are: Working to a V-model (development lifecycle incl. verification and validation) Documentation of specification and design Modular and structured programming Functional testing Appropriate development activities after modifications or adjustments A corresponding report is also produced in this case, to confirm that the software conforms to the safety requirement specification; this report forms part of the validation report for the plant or machine. As with the validation of the safety functions, the software should not be validated by the programmer himself but by an independent person. Customer enquiry Product Product definition Requirement manual and/ or customer requirements Certification, approvals Production release Functional system tests System specification System architecture Implementation manual Safety requirements Safety check System integration test Visual inspection of software Design specification Hardware and software specification Integration test Module test specification HW/SW module tests Evidence of functionality Verification (Have we developed the right system?) Evidence of safety and availability Environmental tests Realisation Design documents (wiring diagram, parts list,...) Source code Validation (Have we developed the right system?) Evidence of compliance with product requirements Compliance with the required standards Pilz GmbH & Co. KG s V-Model for engineering projects 2-50

69 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Today there are some very good, certified software tools available to develop and program safetyrelated software for the relevant safety control system. The use of software tools simplifies the whole validation process, as the blocks contained within the software are essentially pre-certified and at the same time validated. The more these software blocks are used within an application, the less validation work will be needed. The same is true when using parameterisable user software; this also contains pre-validated blocks. The subsequent series of function tests must demonstrate whether the safety functions operate in accordance with their specification. This includes simulation of anticipated faults Validation of resistance to environmental requirements When determining the performance of safety-related parts of control systems, environmental conditions such as the environmental site and the way in which the control system will subsequently be used, play an important role in respect of the system. Relevant key words include waterproofing and vibration protection. The system must therefore be validated by analysis. In specific terms, the analysis must show that the control system or system has the mechanical durability to withstand the wide range of stresses from environmental influences such as shock, vibration and ingress of contaminants. Safety-related parts of control systems must maintain a safe condition under all circumstances. The analysis should also consider factors such as temperature, humidity and electromagnetic compatibility Production of validation report Finally, after all the verification and validation steps have been carried out, the validation report is produced. This contains all the information about the analyses and tests that have been carried out in traceable form, for both the hardware and software. Cross-references to other documents are permitted provided these are traceable and identifiable. Any safety-related parts of control systems which have failed the validation process should be named, along with the factors that led to their exclusion Conclusion Maintenance and repair/periodic tests Naturally, the ravages of time also gnaw away at the performance of safety-related control systems. Wear and tear, corrosion and sustained (mechanical) stresses lead to a reduction in safety; in an extreme case they can even lead to dangerous failures of control components, even the whole control system. For this reason, it is necessary to maintain the safety-related parts of control systems at regular intervals and to carry out periodic tests to check functional safety. A maintenance and repair plan should be available in written form along with records from the periodic tests. The function tests must be carried out by a competent person. Based on the hazard assessment in accordance with 3 of the industrial safety regulations (BetrSichV), the machine or plant operator should define the type, scope and frequency of the periodic tests. To provide details of the industrial safety regulations would be beyond the scope of this chapter; more information on our services can be found on our homepage, webcode:

70 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation Appendix The talk, therefore, surrounds basic, well-tried safety principles and safety components, as well as fault exclusions. The tables correspond to the specifications of EN ISO and EN ISO and provide a brief overview of the safety-related considerations. Basic safety principles in accordance with EN ISO /EN ISO Features of basic safety principles may be: Use of suitable materials and manufacturing methods, taking into account stress, durability, elasticity and wear Correct dimensioning and shaping, taking into account stresses and strains Pressure limiting measures such as pressure control valves and chokes Speed limiting measures Annexes A-D of EN ISO contain a list of the basic safety principles affecting mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical/electronic systems. Well-tried safety principles in accordance with EN ISO /EN ISO Features of well-tried safety principles are, for example: Avoiding faults, e.g. through the safe position of moving parts of components Reducing the probability of error, e.g. by over-dimensioning components Defining the failure mode, e.g. through positive electrical separation/positive opening contacts Reducing the effect of failures, e.g. by multiplying parts Well-tried components in accordance with EN ISO /EN ISO A component can be regarded as well-tried when it has been widely used in the past with successful results in similar applications made using principles which document the suitability and reliability of the component Annexes A-D of EN ISO contain a list of well-tried components for mechanical systems, such as screws, springs and cams for example, as well as components for electrical and electronic systems, such as contactors and relays. There are currently no well-tried components listed for pneumatic and hydraulic systems. Fault exclusions in accordance with EN ISO The requirements for applying a fault exclusion must be indicated in the validation plan. It is important that each fault exclusion can be justified with a reasonable, traceable explanation. Annexes A-D of EN ISO provide an overview of possible fault exclusions based on their presumed faults. For example, these may be: Fracture due to over-dimensioning, on mechanical systems Spontaneous change due to safety device, on pneumatic systems Change of switching times due to positive action, on hydraulic systems Short circuits between adjacent contacts insulated from each other, on electrical/ electronic systems Annexes A-D of EN ISO contain a list of the basic safety principles for mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical/electronic systems. 2-52

71 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.6 Validation What can Pilz do for you? Pilz GmbH & Co. KG offers a wide range of services, including validation within the lifecycle of the plant and machinery. By mirroring the risk assessment and the safety concept, the developed solutions are adapted to suit the actual requirements. Validation by Pilz is followed by an objective and systematic review of the implemented measures, evaluation of the technical safeguards and finally function tests. Compliance with all applicable safety standards and directives is assured. With a wealth of experience in validating machinery, Pilz engineers have developed structured methods for inspecting safety-critical elements of plant and machinery. The PAScal calculation tool helps to verify the performance level that has been achieved for the respective safety function. Validation by Pilz includes: Mirroring of the requirements from the risk assessment and safety concept Verification of the achieved performance level in accordance with EN ISO / EN IEC 62061, based on the calculation tool PAScal, Sistema, etc. Verification of the operating manual Function testing and fault simulation (safety check) Testing of the safety-related software and hardware functions Testing of the sensor/actuator technology and its wiring Measurements (protective earth conductor, sound level,...) Production of a test report with detailed information about the results Acceptance of responsibility as the authorised representative by signing the declaration of conformity How you benefit from validation with Pilz Opt for professional methods during the certification process Consider all relevant aspects of validation and certification Delegate responsibility to Pilz Trust in the safety experts. Complete your overall safety process with CE certification To complete your machine s safety lifecycle, Pilz can offer CE certification as a final service. In this case, Pilz undertakes the whole conformity assessment process, assuming responsibility for the whole procedure. By signing as the authorised representative on the declaration of conformity, Pilz confirms that the requirements of the directives have been met. As a result you obtain the passport your machine needs throughout the European internal market. Regular inspections and up-to-date knowledge of standards, directives and product developments are essential to anyone wishing to operate their plant or machine safely on a long term basis. In accordance with the industrial safety regulations (BetrSichV) 10, it is essential that electrosensitive protective equipment (for example: light grids, light beam devices, scanners etc.) is properly configured and installed and undergoes regular inspection. Responsibility for this lies fully in the hands of the operator. Regular inspections keep you on the safe side An independent inspection body, accredited by DAkkS (German Accreditation Body) in accordance with DIN EN ISO 17020, guarantees objectivity, high availability for your plant and machine, plus the highest possible safety for your staff. At the end of the process Pilz will submit the inspection report and discuss all the results with you. If the inspection is passed, the plant is given a Pilz quality seal. 2-53

72 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation Customers are increasingly regarding certificates, or service providers with third-party certification, as a guarantee of quality. In principle, however, certificates are not legally binding and can be issued by practically anyone. They are merely an indication that a third-party has checked that certain work practices are carried out in accordance with the relevant specifications. The certificates actually say nothing about the quality of this third-party inspection. That s why it is important to have accurate knowledge about the competence of the certifying company or to make enquiries if necessary. The situation is different with accredited companies: Accreditations are legally binding and can only be issued by national bodies. With accreditation, the public accreditation body confirms that a company or institution possesses the competence to perform certain conformity assessment tasks. Conformity assessment is a procedure which checks whether certain specifications have been met, by definition or objective. If an accredited company or institution issues a certificate, the customer can assume that it has the necessary competence to do so Accreditation: Quality seal for customers Accredited conformity assessment bodies, accredited bodies for short, are generally institutions such as test or calibration laboratories, inspection or certification bodies. They provide services such as tests, inspections, certifications, of management systems, persons and products for example, in order to assess the conformity of products, plants or management systems. The assessment is usually part of a test procedure that has to demonstrate that certain requirements, such as those listed in the standards, have been met. In Europe, accreditation is uniformly regulated through the Accreditation Directive 765/2008/EC. Since , all member states have been obliged to operate a single national accreditation body. This will accredit the conformity assessment bodies and evaluate them at regular intervals through audits, to guarantee continued compliance with the requirements. Among other things, the accreditation process checks the independence of the organisation, quality management, training of staff, management of calibrated measuring devices, work instructions and handling of records and test reports, to ensure they conform to the relevant EN/ISO standard. The national accreditation bodies will also examine and evaluate the practical implementation of the on-site certification tasks. Accreditation is beneficial to both the accredited institution and its customers in equal measure: It shows the the customer that the institution is carrying out its work correctly and in accordance with the standards. At the same time, the customer obtains an assessment benchmark to safeguard that competence. Organisations generally work in isolation and rarely, if ever, receive an independent technical assessment of their performance. A regular assessment by an accreditation body examines all aspects of a facility s operations with regard to the continuous production of accurate and reliable data. The accreditation body identifies and discusses areas for improvement; at the end of the assessment, a detailed report is available. If required, the accreditation body can monitor subsequent activities. So the company can be sure that it has introduced appropriate corrective actions. 2-54

73 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation Some examples of accreditation bodies in Europe. 2-55

74 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation In Germany it was the German Accreditation Body (Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH* [DAkkS]) that was founded by the Federal Ministry of Economics and Industry. All previous accreditation bodies (DACH, DAP, TGA/DATECH and DKD) were merged within DAkks early in * In Austria: bmwfi, in Switzerland: SWISS INSPECTION Merging the German accreditation bodies into DAkkS. Accreditation continues to enjoy worldwide recognition due to agreements between DAkkS and the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC), the International Accreditation Forum (IAF) and the European co-operation for Accreditation (EA). MRA MLA International recognition of DAkkS. MRA = Mutual Recognition Agreement MLA = Multilateral Recognition Arrangement 2-56

75 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation These agreements ensure that all accredited bodies worldwide have a standard level of competence and that the services that are carried out satisfy the very highest quality requirements. Both nationally and internationally, accreditation is highly regarded as an indicator of technical competence. Many industry sectors routinely specify accreditation for suppliers of testing services. Unlike certification to ISO 9001, for example, accreditation uses criteria and procedures specifically developed to determine technical competence, thus assuring customers that the test, calibration or measurement data supplied by the laboratory or inspection service is accurate and reliable. Accredited bodies can be recognised by the symbol of the relevant accreditation body, which is usually found on test or calibration reports. A list of the accredited bodies in Germany is available at Technical competence of staff Validity and appropriateness of test methods Traceability of measurements and calibrations to national standards Suitability, calibration and maintenance of test equipment Testing environment Sampling, handling and transportation of test items Quality assurance of test and calibration data By this process, accreditation assures organisations and their customers that test and calibration data produced by their accredited body is accurate and reliable. Example of the DAkkS logo for the Pilz inspection body Accreditation or certification Accreditation uses criteria and procedures specifically developed to determine technical competence. Specialist technical assessors conduct a thorough evaluation of all factors in an organisation that affect the production of test or calibration data. The criteria are based on international standards such as ISO/IEC 17020, ISO/IEC or ISO 15189, which are used worldwide to evaluate accredited organisations. Accredited bodies use this standard specifically to assess factors relevant to technical competence, such as: Certification, to the standard ISO 9001 for example, is widely used by manufacturing and service organisations. It demonstrates that products, services and procedures meet the required quality standards. The aim in certifying an organisation s quality management system to ISO 9001, for example, is to confirm that the management system conforms to this standard. Although laboratories and inspection bodies can be certified to ISO 9001, unlike accreditation, such certification makes no claim regarding technical competence. 2-57

76 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation Tests in accordance with industrial safety regulations (BetrSichV) and accreditation All European employers are legally obliged to provide employees with safe work equipment. In Germany, this has been regulated since October 2002 at the latest by the industrial safety regulations* (BetrSichV). This regulation is the mandatory implementation of the Work Equipment Directive 104/2009/EC, which was adopted by the EU back in 1989 and has recently been revised. * In Austria: Work equipment regulation (AM-VO) In Switzerland: Accident insurance law (UVG) The employer is obliged to guarantee this requirement the first time the work equipment is put into use and through subsequent regular testing. He must determine the test intervals himself, taking account of statutory specifications. He must also ensure that these tests are only carried out by competent persons. Technical rule TRBS 1203 defines the requirements placed on a competent person. Essentially the person must have professional training, a certain amount of professional experience, recent professional activity and regular relevant continuing training in the field to be inspected. The employer is free to decide which staff member will be named the competent person. He must merely be convinced of his competence and be able to prove this in court. Alternatively a company can also outsource these tests to an external provider. However, this does not absolve it of the responsibility of checking the competence of the company that will conduct the tests. Unlike certified companies, accredited bodies prove particularly helpful in this regard, because only accreditation makes a legally binding statement about the competence of such bodies, thereby satisfying the burden of proof. Pilz GmbH & Co. KG operates an accredited inspection body, which companies can appoint to undertake the testing of safeguards on plant and machinery. Due to accreditation, the services are recognised worldwide. The inspection body has access to qualified inspectors in Germany as well as other EU member states. As a result, Pilz can offer its services not only within the EU but worldwide. In 2010, the German Accreditation Body (DAkkS) renewed the accreditation. This shows that Pilz meets all the requirements of DIN EN ISO/ IEC 17020:2004 for a Type C inspection body in the mechanical engineering sector and is competent to carry out the predefined conformity assessment tasks. Pilz can even carry out very complex examinations. The inspection body offers the following services: Example of implementation of the EU Work Equipment Directive 2-58

77 Chapter 2 Standards, directives and laws 2.7 Certification and accreditation Inspection of electrosensitive protective equipment ESPE (light curtains, scanners, safe camera systems) Measurement of stopping performance to confirm the specified safety distances Inspection of additional safeguards (E-STOP, safety gates, 2-hand) Verification of compliance with the minimum specifications of the industrial safety regulations Verification of compliance with the minimum requirements of the Machinery Directive (CE) If the customer selects an accredited inspection body that meets his testing or measurement needs, he can be sure that the inspection body can provide accurate and reliable results. The technical competence of an inspection body depends on factors such as: Qualifications, training, experience of staff The right equipment, correctly calibrated and maintained Appropriate quality assurance procedures Adequate test procedures Validated test methods Inspections based on national standards Precise recording procedure and report production Suitable test facilities Conclusion Essentially, every company is free to have its work equipment inspected by its own staff or to appoint an external company to do the work. However, in every case, the person conducting the inspection must be competent to do the job. If a staff member is selected, the employer can normally assess his competence. If he opts for an external provider, he will have to rely on written evidence. Certificates are generally not sufficiently compelling; in the event of a legal dispute, they do not usually meet the formal requirements. In contrast, accreditations for the relevant services provide reliable, legal security. Informative links: DAkkS: EA: ILAC: All these factors help to ensure that an accredited inspection body is technically competent and able to carry out the tests it offers. 2-59

78

79 3 Safeguards

80

81 Chapter 3 Contents 3 Safeguards Chapter Contents Page 3 Safeguards European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards Standards for guards Standards for dimensioning of guards Standards for the design of protective devices or 3-7 electrosensitive protective equipment 3.2 Guards Fixed guards Movable guards Further aspects on the design of safeguards Protective devices Active optoelectronic protective devices Further important aspects in connection with 3-17 electrosensitive protective equipment Other sensor-based protective equipment Manipulation of safeguards Legal position Conduct contrary to safety What does that mean? What can designers do? User-friendly guards Conclusion

82

83 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.1 European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards Safeguards are necessary to provide operators with as much protection as possible from hazards that may arise during machine operation. They are primarily fences or barriers, which make physical access to the machine difficult. However, sometimes it s neither possible nor sensible to select a fixed guard of this type. In this case, the decision will fall in favour of a control technology solution which shuts down part or all of the machine, should anyone approach a source of danger, or brings the machine to a safe status by another means. Should this type of hazard protection also prove unsuitable, or if potential hazards remain despite the application of these measures, then indicative safety technology is the final option: In this case, the residual dangers are indicated in the operating manual or on the machine itself. Guard barriers and safety devices protect against dangers. 3-3

84 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.1 European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards There are a vast number of regulations that deal with safeguards on machinery. First of all, we ll consider the statutory regulations of European Directive 2006/42/EC. Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) 1.4. Required characteristics of guards and protection devices General requirements Guards and protective devices must: be of robust construction be securely held in place not give rise to any additional hazard not be easy to by-pass or render non-operational be located at an adequate distance from the danger zone cause minimum obstruction to the view of the production process, and enable essential work to be carried out on the installation and/or replacement of tools and for maintenance purposes by restricting access exclusively to the area where the work has to be done, if possible without the guard having to be removed or the protective device having to be disabled. Guards must, where possible, protect against the ejection or falling of materials or objects and against emissions generated by the machinery Special requirements for guards Fixed guards Fixed guards must be fixed using systems that can be opened or removed only with tools. Their fixing systems must remain attached to the guards or to the machinery when the guards are removed. Where possible, guards must be incapable of remaining in place without their fixings Interlocking movable guards Interlocking movable guards must: as far as possible remain attached to the machinery when open be designed and constructed in such a way that they can be adjusted only by means of an intentional action 3-4

85 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.1 European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards Interlocking movable guards must be associated with an interlocking device that: prevents the start of hazardous machinery functions until they are closed and gives a stop command whenever they are no longer closed Where it is possible for an operator to reach the danger zone before the risk due to the hazardous machinery functions has ceased, movable guards must be associated with a guard locking device in addition to an interlocking device that: prevents the start of hazardous machinery functions until the guard is closed and locked, and keeps the guard closed and locked until the risk of injury from the hazardous machinery functions has ceased Interlocking movable guards must be designed in such a way that the absence or failure of one of their components prevents starting or stops the hazardous machinery functions Adjustable guards restricting access Adjustable guards restricting access to those areas of the moving parts strictly necessary for the work must be: adjustable manually or automatically, depending on the type of work involved, and readily adjustable without the use of tools Special requirements for protective devices Protective devices must be designed and incorporated into the control system in such a way that: moving parts cannot start up while they are within the operator s reach persons cannot reach moving parts while the parts are moving, and the absence or failure of one of their components prevents starting or stops the moving parts. They must be adjustable only by means of intentional action. 3-5

86 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.1 European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards A number of points in the above requirements are considered separately here: Guards must, where possible, protect against the ejection or falling of materials or objects and against emissions generated by the machinery. The active direction of the protection is described here: It is not only necessary to consider the hazardous approach of people towards the danger zone; many hazards arise from the machinery itself and therefore require protection. Safeguards must cause minimum obstruction to the view of the production process. A further requirement for a fixed guard is that its fixing systems remain attached to the machinery or to the guard itself once the guard is removed. So in future, screws on protective covers for example will need to be fixed in such a way that they cannot be lost once the guard is removed. The commentary entitled Guide to application of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC 2 nd Edition June 2010 issued by the European Commission provides an interpretation: The requirement is for a type of fixed guards to be used where it is expected that the machine operator will remove them. A practical example would be opening up the guard for a monthly clean. In contrast, this does not need to apply to guards which are removed solely for general overhaul or for more major repairs. It is therefore advisable for machine manufacturers to classify their equipment accordingly. Protective devices must be adjustable only by means of intentional action. This requirement makes particular sense in relation to light beam devices or light curtains. These devices are adjusted as the machine is put into service, after which point they should not be adjustable without good reason, otherwise the necessary safety distance may no longer be guaranteed. This very strict requirement throws up a number of questions in respect of feasibility. For example, does this apply to all the screws on a safety fence? In an extreme case, even the floor fixings of the safety fence would be subject to this requirement. 3-6

87 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.1 European Union standards, directives and laws relating to safeguards Standards for guards In addition to the statutory regulations of the Machinery Directive, the following European standards currently exist relating to safeguards: Standard EN 953:1997+A1:2009 EN 1088:1995+A2:2008 Title Safety of machinery Guards. General requirements for the design and construction of fixed and movable guards Safety of machinery Interlocking devices associated with guards. Principles for design and selection Standards for dimensioning of guards Standard EN ISO 13857:2008 EN 349:1995+A2:2008 Title Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs (ISO 13857:2008) Safety of machinery Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body Standards for the design of protective devices or electrosensitive protective equipment Standard EN :2010 IEC :2006 CLC/TS :2006 CLC/TS :2008 replaces EN :2003 EN ISO 13855:2010 replaces EN 999 Title Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 1: General requirements and tests Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 2: Particular requirements for equipment using active optoelectronic protective devices (AOPDs) Safety of machinery Electrosensitive protective equipment Part 3: Particular requirements for active optoelectronic protective devices responsive to diffuse reflection (AOPDDR) Safety of machinery Positioning of safeguards with respect to the approach speeds of parts of the human body 3-7

88 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards A guard is part of a machine which is specifically required as a form of physical barrier to protect persons from the hazards of machinery. In some cases the same safeguards can simultaneously protect the machine from persons, for example, if time-critical processes may not be interrupted by persons approaching at random. The study below considers the first scenario only. Examples of guards A guard forms a physical barrier between the machine operator and the hazard, in contrast to protective devices or electrosensitive protective equipment such as light curtains and light beam devices, which are covered later. Safeguards of this type do not prevent access to a hazard, but detect a person or part of a person s body when a hazard is approached. In this case, the hazard is shut down via a downstream control system so that the danger is removed before the hazard zone is reached. Depending on its design, a guard may be implemented as housing, casing, shield, door, cover or some other format. Guards are available in a wide range of types and formats, therefore Fixed guards Fixed guards are permanently attached to the machine. This type of safeguard is suitable when it is unnecessary to remove the guard under normal operating conditions or when access is not required during the work process. Examples would be chain covers or grilles in front of motor fans. 3-8

89 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards Movable guards If access is required to the danger zone, a movable guard can be used, e.g. a safety gate. The frequency with which access is required will determine whether the guard needs to be fixed or movable. The standards can help you make this decision. EN 953 Where access is required only for machine setting, process correction or maintenance, the following types of guard should be used: a) Movable guard if the foreseeable frequency of access is high (e.g. more than once per shift), or if removal or replacement of a fixed guard would be difficult. Movable guards shall be associated with an interlock or an interlock with guard locking (see EN 1088). b) Fixed guard only if the foreseeable frequency of access is low, its replacement is easy, and its removal and replacement are carried out under a safe system of work. Note: In this case, the term interlock means the electrical connection between the position of the safeguard and the drives to be shut down. In safety technology, the commonly understood mechanical interlock, meaning a lock, is called a guard locking device. Several safety gates can be monitored with just one evaluation device thanks to series connection. 3-9

90 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards EN Frequency of access (frequency of opening the guard for access to the danger zone) For applications requiring frequent access, the interlocking device shall be chosen to provide the least possible hindrance to the operation of the guard. A clear distinction should be made between the following: the concept of frequent access required by the normal operation of the machine, as e.g. once per cycle to feed raw products to the machine and remove finished products the concept of occasional access, e.g. to carry out adjustment or maintenance interventions, or for random corrective actions in danger zones Each of these concepts is associated with an order of magnitude differing greatly as to the frequency of human intervention in the danger zone (e.g. one hundred times per hour in the case of one access per cycle, and several times per day in the case of occasional access for adjustment or maintenance during an automatic production process). EN Frequency and duration of exposure Consider the following aspects to determine the level of exposure: need for access to the danger zone based on all modes of use, for example normal operation, maintenance nature of access, for example manual feed of material, setting It should then be possible to estimate the average interval between exposures and therefore the average frequency of access. Where the duration is shorter than 10 minutes, the value may be decreased to the next level. This does not apply to frequency of exposure 1 h, which should not be decreased at any time. Select the appropriate row for frequency and duration of exposure (Fr) from the following table. Frequency and duration of exposure (Fr) Frequency of exposure Duration > 10 min 1 h 5 > 1 h to 1 day 5 > 1 day to 2 weeks 4 > 2 weeks to 1 year 3 > 1 year For applications using interlocking devices with automatic monitoring, a functional test (see of EN :1992) can be carried out every time the device changes its state, i.e. at every access. If, in such a case, there is only infrequent access, the interlocking device should be used with additional measures such as conditional guard unlocking (e.g. separate approval), as between consecutive functional tests the probability of occurrence of an undetected fault is increased. 3-10

91 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards Summary Guards which need to be opened during production mode are generally designed as movable guards. These are in complete contrast to fixed guards, which are only operated rarely, for example, when they are opened to carry out maintenance or repair. This classification also needs to be well-founded because different costs will be associated with the type or selection of guard. Fixed guards for maintenance or repair work Further aspects on the design of safeguards Once the decision has been made to use a movable guard, the next step is to perform a risk assessment in accordance with EN 62061, EN ISO or, for a transitional period, even EN 954-1, to determine the safety level (category, safety integrity level SIL or performance level PL). The corresponding control system is then designed and validated. These control systems will include sensors in the form of switches, which detect the position of the guard. Via this detection feature, hazardous movements can be stopped as a result of the guard being opened. An additional safety function can prevent drives starting up unexpectedly when a safety gate is opened. The drive s stopping time will need to be considered: When a safety gate is opened, if it can be assumed that a drive with a long stopping time will generate a hazardous movement, this gate will require a guard locking device. The guard locking device must be unlocked by actively operating a release. This is the only way to guarantee that the safety gate is not released unintentionally as the result of a power failure, for example. In this case, it s also important to note that a person who is in the danger zone at the time of the power failure and has shut the safety gate behind him cannot be released by an unlock command on the machine control system. Such a case may be rare, but it is conceivable, so any guard locking devices that are considered will have a mechanical release function. However, operating staff must be sure to have the appropriate actuation tool available. Safety gates connected in series When selecting sensors to scan movable guards, the question arises as to whether such sensors can be connected in series to an evaluation device, and if so, how many? The answer to this question depends on the faults that can be anticipated (see fault lists in EN ). The following example of safety gates connected in series is intended to illustrate this point: 3-11

92 A1 S31 S P3 S11S12 S13 S14 S21S22 S33 S34 P POWER CH. 1 CH P4 A2 Y30 Y31Y A1 S31 S P3 S11S12 S13 S14 S21S22 S33 S34 P POWER CH. 1 CH P4 A2 Y30 Y31Y A1 S31S P3 S11 S12 S13 S14 S21 S22 S33 S34 P POWER CH. 1 CH P4 A2 Y30 Y31 Y A1 S31S P3 S11 S12 S13 S14 S21 S22 S33 S34 P POWER CH. 1 CH P4 A2 Y30 Y31Y Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards 1 2 PNOZ X3P PNOZ X3P 3 4 PNOZ X3P PNOZ X3P Example of safety gates connected in series. 1 The example shows three safety gates connected in series to an evaluation device. Initially all the safety gates are closed and the relay s outputs are on, i.e. the machine can be operated. 2 On the left-hand safety gate, a short circuit occurs in the line to the switch with the N/C contact: At first the fault is not detected and the machine can continue operating. 3 The left-hand safety gate is then opened, an event which the left switch signals to the relay. During a feasibility comparison of the two switches the relay discovers an inconsistency and switches to a fault condition, i.e. once the safety gate is closed the machine cannot be restarted. 4 Now the right-hand safety gate is also opened. Via these signals the relay once again detects a normal condition. The fault condition is reset, the safety gates can once again be closed from left to right and the machine is ready to start up again. This example illustrates an undetected fault in the safety circuit. An additional fault could cause the whole safety gate guard to fail to danger. These and similar faults are described by the term fault masking. In the current standards, the maximum diagnostic coverage (DC) that the switch can achieve is restricted, depending on the masking probability. 3-12

93 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards The occurrence of this type of masking should be taken into account on mechanical switches and magnetic proximity switches alike. Only switches with internal diagnostics and an OSSD output, as commonly found on RFID based switches, are unaffected by this. Safety switches with integrated fault detection. In practice, a single switch pair that is evaluated by a safety relay can achieve a DC = 99%. Based on this premise, in the current draft of EN ISO 14119, the maximum DC for a group of interlinked switches is stated based on the number of switches connected in series and their frequency of operation. Mechanical switches In this context, the question also arises as to the need for mechanical redundancy and the number of independent switches on a safety gate. When installed correctly, magnetically operated and RFID proximity switches are often designed so that a single mechanical fault does not lead to the loss of the safety function; however, on mechanically operated switches (reed or roller switches), particular attention needs to be paid to the singlechannel mechanical actuator. The documentation for the switch should always be checked carefully to establish whether the switch itself has any assured properties and if so, which. This is particularly important when a dual-channel electrical switching element is present. If not explicitly confirmed by the switch manufacturer under intended use, fault exclusions for the mechanical part of these switches must be justified by the user. This is often very difficult if not impossible to achieve, as it is difficult to estimate the effects of wear, vibration, corrosion, inappropriate mechanical stress, for example. In cases such as these, to achieve PL d or PL e you should either use two mechanical gate switches per gate, one dual-channel magnetic switch or one RFID switch with OSSD output. As you can see in the table below, masking restricts the maximum achievable DC, and as a direct result, the achievable PL. If a series of interlinked switches is required to meet PL e, a technical solution is available using switches with integrated fault detection. As masking cannot occur in this case, it is possible to have interlinked switches without restricting the DC or PL. Number of frequently used Number of additional Masking probability DC for guard limited to Maximum achievable PL movable guards 1) movable guards 1 Low Low ( 60 %) PL d to 4 Medium Low ( 60 %) PL d > 4 High None (< 60 %) PL c > 1 - High None (< 60 %) PL c 1) Switching frequency greater than once per hour 3-13

94 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.2 Guards Assessment of magnetic switches One problem has proved to be critical when using magnetically operated gate switches (with reed contacts). If pairs of switches and safety relays are used and their mutual suitability has not been tested by the manufacturer, the machine builder must ensure that peak currents within the switch do not cause premature wear. This mainly affects pairs of reed switches with relay-based safety units. For the assessment it is necessary to calculate the maximum occurring peak current I S (see Formula 1) and to compare this with the permitted peak current of the switch I Smax. All switches in series connections must be considered, which is why the lowest of all the permitted peak currents must be greater than or equal to the maximum switching current (see Formula 1). R Smin (i) I Smax (i) U Pmax R Pmin I S Formula 1 Minimum internal resistance of switch i Maximum permitted peak current of switch i Maximum voltage Minimum internal resistance of safety relay Maximum switching current I S = U max R Pmin + R Smin (i) i I S MIN (I Smax (i)) i There is another new factor to consider from ISO relating to the consideration of switches on movable guards. This involves a potential hazard which might arise when a gate in a safety fence can be opened to such an extent that a person can access the danger zone through the opening without the corresponding gate switch receiving a signal change. This is more of a theoretical hazard but it can be averted by increasing the safety distance proportionate to the size of the undetected gate opening. In practice, the problem should never arise in the first place with the installation of a door switch that has been selected and fitted to meet the requirements of the situation. In this respect, the actual safety distance between the gate and site of the hazard is of greater practical relevance. Here, the question arises as to what happens when the safety gate in a safety fence is opened and a person enters the danger zone but the machine is still running down or braking. In this case, the relevant danger zones can still be reached if the person approaches at sufficient speed and the machine has a correspondingly long braking time. This situation has so far not been resolved by standards and pragmatic approaches have tended to dominate. According to the standard, the calculation for the use of light curtains can be used in this case. Safety distance S is calculated as S = (K x T). K is the walking speed of the person of 1,600 mm/s and T is the time from the triggering of the gate switch to the machine stopping (i.e. safe status is achieved). The time that it takes to open the gate may be deducted. This can be identified either by considering how long this may take in theory or by timing it in practice, as no standard values are provided. Formula 2 The problem of premature wear does not normally occur on mechanically operated switches and switches with OSSD output because wear on these switches is primarily determined via the average current and the thermal behaviour. 3-14

95 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices Active optoelectronic protective devices Protective devices ( electrosensitive protective equipment, abbreviated to ESPE below) are always used when access to the corresponding hazard zone is intended to be particularly easy to achieve and there are no hazardous repercussions to be anticipated from the machine itself (example: welding or grinding processes). To ensure that a potential hazard can be shut down quickly enough, the protective device must be installed at an appropriate distance. This distance or safety distance (S) is defined in EN ISO and depends in particular on the following factors: Monitoring production areas in which active intervention is required. t 1 = Response time of the protective device itself. t 2 = Response time of the machine, i.e. the machine s stopping performance in response to the signal from the protective device C = Potential approach towards a danger zone undetected by the protective device, e.g. reaching through two beams of a light curtain undetected, depending on the distance of these beams K = Anticipated approach speed of the human body or parts of the human body. This factor is defined in EN ISO as 1,600 mm/s for walking speed and 2,000 mm/s for hand speed. The distance to be implemented is therefore S = K* (t 1 + t 2 ) + C Safe camera system for three-dimensional zone monitoring. 3-15

96 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices EN defines the following preferential distances: Resolution Calculation formula (Distance S [mm]) Remarks d 40 mm S = 2000 x T + 8 ( d 14 ) If the result is < 100 mm, a distance of at least 100 mm must be maintained. If the result is > 500 mm, you can use In this case, S may not be < 500 mm. S = x T + 8 ( d 14) as the calculation 40 < d 70 mm S = 1600 x T Height of the lowest beam 300 mm Height of the highest beam 900 mm Multiple single beams No. of beams Beam heights in mm Multibeam S = 1600 x T , 600, 900, , 700, , 900 Single beam S = 1600 x T If the risk assessment permits a single beam arrangement If the ESPEs form horizontal or inclined protected fields above an accessible area which requires safeguarding, the fields must be positioned at a minimum height, as pre-determined by the application and ESPE. Here too, the safety distance between the outer edge of the protected field and the danger point to be safeguarded should be such that the possibility of injuries resulting from the hazardous movement in the danger zone is excluded, bearing in mind the machine s stopping performance. 3-16

97 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices The following should be noted as significant new factors: Even when a guard has been carefully designed, any means of defeating it must be taken into account. Any possibility of reaching over or around a detection field needs to be excluded. As it is not always possible to cover any gaps alongside the detection field and an adjacent safety fence, safety distances between the person and the danger zones need to be observed here as well. The calculation of these distances is very similar to those for safety distances that apply to access to danger zones through a detection field. Particular attention needs to be paid to this important difference. In practice, it could for example be the case that access to a danger zone is protected by a vertically installed light grid. This light grid however is often not as high as a person might be able to reach and - depending on a guardrail, for example - may be only 1,100 mm high. In this case, a person would therefore be able to stand just in front of the light grid without interrupting the detection field. Furthermore, they can in this case still lean forward and with an outstretched arm access the area behind the light grid with their hand. In order to avert hazards in this situation, minimum distances between the danger zone and light curtain are defined. These minimum distances are comprised of two components: Walking speed and hand speed multiplied by the system s reaction time plus an additional value which depends on the height of the danger zone and the height of the safeguard. This additional value may be up to 1,200 mm. Where space is limited, it is worth looking at covering all possible means of defeating the system permanently. Information on positioning and sizing of pressuresensitive mats can be found in Clause 7 of EN ISO Here as well, the familiar formula of S = (K x T) +C is used. In this case K equals 1,600 mm/s, derived from normal walking speed. A minimum distance of C = 1,200 mm is required to protect an outstretched arm or hand that will not be detected by the pressure-sensitive mat. The design of the safety distance S for the arrangement of two-hand control devices is based on the formula S = (K x T) + C. In this case, C is 250 mm and K is 1,600 mm/s (hand speed) Further important aspects in connection with electrosensitive protective equipment Restart Once a protective device has been triggered, a machine may not be restarted automatically once the protected field has been cleared. This should only be possible via a reset on a control device outside the danger zone, with visual contact Encroachment from behind As well as the obvious protection for the danger zone it s also necessary to consider the possibility of reaching over, under or around the device, as well as encroaching from behind. A purely mechanical safeguard or another light curtain can be used to provide protection against encroachment from behind. If there is any possibility of defeating the safeguards, additional measures must be taken to protect them. 3-17

98 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices Muting Muting is the safe, temporary, automatic suspension of electrosensitive protective equipment (ESPE), so that material can be transported into and out of a danger zone. Special sensors are used to ensure the muting controller only starts the muting cycle when the material is being transported through the protected field. The sensors must be positioned in such a way that persons cannot activate the muting sensors. If anyone should access the protected area, the potentially dangerous movement is shut down immediately. The industry has developed special safety relays with muting function specifically for this case. Some light curtains also provide the option to mute the protected field only partially (blanking). In this process for example, the precise section through which the item is being transported is rendered passive. However, under no circumstances should anyone be able to reach the danger zone undetected via this deactivated section of the protected field. A design measure (e.g. a cover for the remaining free space) should be used to ensure that nobody can reach the danger zone from the side, in between the item and the protective device. Protective beam limited double muting/muting with four muting sensors. 3-18

99 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices Other sensor-based protective equipment Laser scanners A second ESPE installed horizontally or at an angle is often used to protect against encroachment from behind. Often this only covers a small area, so a scanner can be used for additional optical monitoring of encroachment from behind. A laser beam scans the area to be monitored. If the beam is reflected by a foreign body, this will be detected and the hazardous movement will be shut down Safe camera systems The latest developments on the market are safe camera systems for monitoring freely configurable zones. In contrast to simple sensors, they are able to record and analyse detailed information about the whole monitored zone. This way potentially hazardous work processes are safely monitored, protecting man and machine Pressure-sensitive mats Many pressure-sensitive mats operate in accordance with the normally open principle: They require the use of special evaluation devices, which account for this actuation principle and guarantee appropriate fault detection. Pressure-sensitive mats that operate to the normally closed principle are also available, however; where a low safety level is required and the electrical loads are low, these can be used to activate contactors directly. The most popular material used on pressuresensitive mats is EPDM, but as this is not permanently oil-proof, it has limited suitability for use in a machine environment. Other materials such as NBR are available, but they reduce the sensitivity of the sensor. PNOZ e4.1p Using electronic safety relays to evaluate pressure-sensitive mats. 3-19

100 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices Two-hand control devices Two-hand control devices are used on a workstation to keep both of the operator s hands committed to a two-hand circuit; while the devices are operated, the hands are kept away from the danger zone. Various types of two-hand circuits are defined and can be applied to suit the necessary level of protection: Requirement levels for two-hand control devices: Requirements Types EN 574 I II III Clause A B C Use of both hands 5.1 Release of either actuator initiates the cessation of the output signal 5.2 Prevention of accidental operation 5.4 Protective effect shall not be easily defeated 5.5 Re-initiation of output signal only when both actuators are released 5.6 Output signal only after synchronous actuation within max. 500 ms 5.7 Use of category 1 in accordance with EN Use of category 3 in accordance with EN Use of category 4 in accordance with EN P2HZ X4P Evaluation of two-hand control circuits. 3-20

101 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.3 Protective devices Functional safeguards Protection against unexpected start-up in accordance with EN 1037 When an operation is in progress, the same question always arises: when a machine is brought to a halt via an operational stop command, how safely is the machine prevented from starting up unintentionally : What happens in this situation should a fault occur in the control system and a drive is started up unexpectedly? This is an issue which is just as important as the consideration of functional safety associated with more obvious safeguards. A key point to consider is the issue of convertercontrolled drives. These drives are often stopped by signals such as Zero Speed or Controller Inhibit. The desire is often to avoid shutting down the power supply so as not to lose any data about the current drive status. In some cases, spontaneous shutdown of the connection between the mains and the converter or even between the converter and the drive is linked to device defects and so cannot be considered. External drive monitoring through the PNOZmulti safety system with speed monitoring. If an unintended movement such as this is unacceptable, safe drive technology must be used, which will prevent such faulty behaviour from the start (see also Chapter 7: Safe motion control). In cases such as these the machine designer has two options: If isolation from the energy supply is possible without damaging the unit and without initiating other hazardous movements, standstill monitoring can be used. Although the convertercontrolled drive is stationery it is still active, so it is monitored to check it does not move. Should any movement occur on account of an error, the supply to the whole branch is shut down via a contactor. This solution assumes that the slight drive movement which occurs in the event of an error does not cause a hazard. The movement itself consists of two parts: The part which activates the sensor technology for monitoring and the part occurring before the protection circuit has reacted and a contactor has switched. These influences must be examined in a risk assessment. Drive-integrated safety. 3-21

102 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Dealing with safeguards and their manipulation is an issue in which the true causes have long been largely taboo. It s a situation that s difficult to understand, for without negative feedback, where can you start to make positive changes in the design of plant and machinery? This situation has now changed: The confederation of commercial trade associations has published a study showing that safety equipment had been manipulated on almost 37% of the metal processing machinery examined. In other words: In a good third of cases, manipulations have been detected and examined, although it s safe to assume that the unreported number may be somewhat higher. One fact that hasn t changed, however, is the number of accidents recurring on machinery on which the safeguards are manipulated, as the BG bulletins regularly show. The report also reveals that in at least 50% of all cases, the reasons for manipulation can be traced right back to the design departments Legal position The legal position is clear: European and domestic law (e.g. EC Machinery Directive, EN standards, German Equipment and Product Safety Act [GPSG]) mean that it is the responsibility of machine manufacturers only to place on the market products that have an adequate level of safety. Manufacturers must establish all the potential hazards on all their machines in advance and assess the associated risks. They are responsible for developing a safety concept for the respective products, implementing that concept and providing the relevant documentation, based on the results of the hazard analysis and risk assessment. Potential hazards must not be allowed to impact negatively on subsequent users, third parties or the environment. Any reasonably foreseeable misuse must also be included. Operating instructions should also clearly define the products intended use and prohibit any known improper uses. Design engineers must therefore make reasoned decisions regarding situations in which events may be above and beyond what you would normally expect. This is a subject which is generally familiar and is considered these days, as CE marking clearly shows. Or is it? Despite the formal declarations from manufacturers that they themselves have taken responsibility for complying with all the essential health and safety requirements, behaviour-based accidents continue to occur on machinery. Although the plant or machinery complies with the formal specifications, the design still failed to meet needs or satisfy safety requirements. 3-22

103 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Design engineers should never underestimate the technical intelligence and creativity of machine users, as revealed by some dubious practices for defeating safeguards: It begins with crude but effective access to the mechanical structure of the signal flow chain and extends to skillfully filed keys for type 2 safety switches. It includes loosened, positive-locking shaft/hub connections on switch cams, which are difficult to detect, as well as sophisticated short and cross circuits and disguised, carefully hidden but rapidly accessible override switches in N/C / N/O combinations, in the connection lead between the control system and the safety switch. This is only a small sample of the manipulations that are detected; it is by no means all. Design engineers should also consider that machine workers generally have a fair level of technical understanding and manual dexterity and also have considerably more time to become annoyed at ill-conceived operating and safety concepts and to consider effective improvements than the designers had for their development and implementation. Quite often they will have been reliant purely on the normative specifications, without being aware of the realistic, practical requirements. The task of working out potential manipulations in advance is therefore contradictory: Design engineers with little experience in this area are supposed to simulate the imagination and drive of the machine operators, who may frequently work under pressure but still have enough time and energy to work out alternative solutions. They are supposed to incorporate their expertise into their designs and, under today s usual time constraints, convert this into safety measures which are manipulation-proof. A task that s not always easy to resolve. BGIA has developed a check list of manipulation incentives, which performs a valuable service in predicting potential manipulations. From the author s point of view, however, enormous progress would be made if designers in future would increasingly put themselves in the user s position and honestly and candidly ask themselves what they would do with the available operating and safety concept. 3-23

104 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Conduct contrary to safety What does that mean? Terminology Defeat in a simple manner Render inoperative manually or with readily available objects (e.g. pencils, pieces of wire, bottle openers, cable ties, adhesive tape, metallised film, coins, nails, screwdrivers, penknives, door keys, pliers; but also with tools required for the intended use of the machine), without any great intellectual effort or manual dexterity. Manipulation In terms of safety technology: an intentional, unauthorised, targeted and concealed intervention into a machine s safety concept, using tools. Sabotage Secret, intentional and malicious intervention into a technical system, in order to harm employees or colleagues. Word s origin: The wooden shoe (Fr.: sabot) of an an agricultural worker or Luddite in the 19th century, which was thrown into a lathe. When designing and constructing machinery, manufacturers specify what the machines can and should be able to achieve. At the same time they also specify how the user should handle the machine. A successful design involves much more than simply the machine fulfilling its technological function in terms of the output quantity documented in the implementation manual, and the quality and tolerances of the manufactured products. It must also have a coherent safety and operating concept to enable users to implement the machine functions in the first place. The two areas are interlinked, so they ought to be developed and realised in a joint, synchronous operation. Numerous product safety standards (e.g. EN 1010 or EN 12717) are now available, offering practical solutions. Nonetheless, planning and design deficiencies are still to be found, even on new machinery. For example: Recurring disruptions to the workflow, brought about for example by deficiencies in the technological design or in the precision of the components (direct quote from a plant engineer: The greatest contribution design engineers can make to active health and safety is to design the machines to work exactly in the way which was promised at the sale. ) Opportunities for intervention or access, e.g. to remove the necessary random samples, are either difficult or non-existent Lack of segmented shutdowns with material buffers, so that subsections can be accessed safely in the event of a fault, without having to shut down the entire plant and lose valuable time starting it up again Ill-conceived safety concepts are still found in practice on a regular basis. Many errors are made with interlocked safeguards, for example, when Non-hazardous or frequently operated function elements, e.g. actuators, storage containers, filler holes, are installed behind (interlocked) safeguards The interlock interrupts the hazardous situation quickly and positively when a safeguard is opened, but afterwards the machine or process is unable to continue or must be restarted 3-24

105 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Nobody has any doubt that designers act to the best of their knowledge and belief when they design and implement technological functions as well as those functions relating to persons or operators. One can t really blame them for assuming that subsequent users will behave reasonably and correctly when using the machinery. But it s precisely here that caution is advised: Human behaviour is mainly benefit-oriented, both in everyday and in working life. People strive to perform the tasks they are given or have set themselves as quickly and as well as necessary, with the least exertion possible. People will also try to intervene actively in support of a process, if it isn t running quite as it should. They will make every effort to rectify troublesome faults as quickly and simply as possible. If they can t because of the design (and the fault rectification procedure set down in the operating manual), they will find a way out by defeating the interlock, for example. They will often regard the additional work as a personal misfortune for the smooth performance of their work function. By defeating the safety measures that have been provided the procedure is much less complex, and is therefore seen as a success. Successful behaviour tends to be repeated until it is reinforced as a habit, which in this case is unfortunately contrary to safety and indeed dangerous. The more such rule breaches are tolerated at management level and go unsanctioned, the greater the probability that the rules will continue to be breached without punishment. Incorrect conduct becomes the new, informal rule. For over the course of time, the awareness of the risks that are being taken will lessen and those involved become convinced that they have mastered the potential hazards through vigilance. But the risk is still there; it s just waiting for its chance to strike. Risk Unprotected Interlock all or nothing leads to manipulation! Work under special conditions and accepted risks Gain in safety Residual risk Normal mode Special mode Operation Interlocking concept for special operating modes. 3-25

106 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards There s no question that the factors that trigger an accident seem initially to rest with the conduct of those affected. However, design errors on the machine encourage the misconduct that s so dangerous (even life threatening) to those involved. Such machines do not comply with the EC Machinery Directive. In other words: It is the manufacturer s responsibility to design protective measures in such a way that they provide a sufficient level of safety, in accordance with the determined risk, while still guaranteeing the functionality and user friendliness of the machine. Ultimately it is always better to accept a calculable, acceptable residual risk with a carefully thought out safety concept, tailored to the practical requirements, than to expose the machine operator to the full risk of insecure processes following successful manipulation What can designers do? Designing safety-related machinery means more than simply complying with regulations and other legal stipulations. Consulting the relevant regulations and standards, dismissively asking Where does it say that?! to ensure that only those safety measures that are strictly necessary are implemented is no substitute for deep consideration of solutions that are not only right for safety and right for people but are also fit for purpose. Most of all, designers must be more sensitive to operators demands for operability of machines and safety devices and provide a serious response, because their demands are based on practical experience. This does not make the safety-related design more difficult, but is the basis on which to build user-friendly, safety-related machinery. It s essential that the actual development and design is preceded by a detailed, candid analysis of the operational requirements, the results of which are recorded in a binding requirement specification. If not, the situation may arise in which the machine and its incorporated safety measures may not be accepted. What s more, they could provoke users into creating new ideas, most of which do not support health and safety. These in turn could conjure up a whole new set of hazards, which were far from the minds of the original designers. Experience shows that the first part of this challenge can be met at reasonable cost and with a sufficient level of success through systematic troubleshooting, using function structures and signal flow paths. As for the second part of the task, counteracting manipulation attempts, designers must rely on their tried and trusted methods, as with any other design task. After all, safety-related design is hardly a dark art! Nonetheless: Manipulation rarely occurs voluntarily; it usually indicates that machine and operating concepts are not at their optimum. Conduct contrary to safety should always be anticipated when: Work practices demand actions which do not have a direct, positive impact on outcomes Work practices enforce constant repetition of the same work steps, or fresh approaches are always required in order to achieve work targets Safeguards restrict the line of vision and room for manoeuvre required to perform the activity Safeguards impede or even block the visual/ auditory feedback required to work successfully Troubleshooting and fault removal are impossible when the safeguards are open 3-26

107 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards In other words: Manipulations must always be anticipated when restricted machine functions or unacceptable difficulties tempt, even force, the machine user to improve safety concepts. Manufacturers must design protective measures so that the functionality and user friendliness of the machine are guaranteed at a tolerable, acceptable level of residual risk: They must predict future manipulation attempts, use design measures to counteract them and at the same time improve machine handling. The obligations of machine manufacturers are threefold: 1. Anticipate reasons and incentives for manipulation, remove the temptation to defeat interlocks by creating well thought-out operating and safety concepts for machinery. 2. Make manipulation difficult by design, e.g. by installing safety switches in accessible areas, using hinged switches, attaching safety switches and their actuators with non-removable screws, etc. 3. Under the terms of the monitoring obligation specified in the German Equipment and Product Safety Act (GPSG), systematically identify and rectify any deficiencies through rigorous product monitoring with all operators (reports from customer service engineers and spare part deliveries are sometimes very revealing in this respect!) User-friendly guards It s important to recognise that safeguards even interlocked guards are always willingly accepted and are not manipulated when they do not obstruct but actually support or even simplify the workflow. Faults in the safety concept which force operators to manipulate safeguards are genuine design faults, for which the machine manufacturer is liable in some circumstances. Safety-related solutions with an acceptable residual risk must be put in place, not just for fault-free normal operation, but also for setup, testing, fault removal and troubleshooting. Simply to make manipulation attempts more difficult on a technical level, as laid out in the supplement to EN 1088 for example, only appears to solve the problem. For if there is enough pressure, a solution will be found. It s more important to eliminate the reason for manipulation. What s needed is not excessive functionality (even in terms of safety technology), but user friendliness. If there s any doubt as to whether the safety concept is adequate, it s recommended that you seek expert advice from the relevant employer s liability insurance association or from the safety component manufacturer. The client who places the order for a machine can also help to counteract manipulation by talking to the machine manufacturer and candidly listing the requirements in an implementation manual, binding to both parties, and by talking openly about the faults and deficiencies within the process, then documenting this information. 3-27

108 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Guards use physical barriers to stop people and hazardous situations coinciding in time and space. Their essential design requirements are stated in EN 953 and EN Safety-related and ergonomic aspects must be taken into account alongside questions regarding the choice of materials and consideration of mechanical aspects such as stability. These factors are decisive, not just in terms of the quality of the guard function but also in determining whether the safeguards, designed and constructed at considerable expense, will be used willingly by employees or be defeated and even manipulated. Servicing work Troubleshooting work Retrofit work without tools Safeguard is opened for Maintenance work Repairs (installation processes) with tools Experience shows that despite all the protestations, almost every safeguard has to be removed or opened at some point over the course of time. When safeguards are opened, it s fundamentally important that hazards are avoided where possible and that employees are protected from danger. The reason for opening, the frequency of opening and the actual risk involved in carrying out activities behind open safeguards (see the following illustrations) will determine the procedures used to attach and monitor safeguards. Movable interlocked safeguard Once opened, the machine may only be set in motion under certain conditions, e.g.: with two-hand circuit, in jog mode, at reduced operating speed Safeguard fixed to the machine Before opening: Operate main switch, secure switch with lock, attach warning sign Opening procedures on safeguards. 3-28

109 Chapter 3 Safeguards 3.4 Manipulation of safeguards Hazardous movement is safeguarded Safeguard is opened Switch to special mode Secure Press Where safeguards are opened as a condition of operation or more frequently (for example: at least once per shift), this must be possible without using tools. Where there are hazardous situations, use of an interlock or guard locking device must be guaranteed. Further protective measures must be adjusted to suit the resulting risk and the drive/ technological conditions, to ensure that the activities which need to be carried out while the safeguards are open can be performed at an acceptable level of risk. This procedure conforms to the EC Machinery Directive. It allows work to be carried out while the safeguards are open as a special operating mode and gives this practice a legal basis Conclusion Avoid hazards Hazardous movement is interrupted Move on under certain conditions Just some final words in conclusion for all designers: Designing interlocks so that absolutely no movement of the machine or subsections is possible once the safeguard has been opened actually encourages the type of conduct which is contrary to safety and, ultimately, leads to accidents. Nevertheless, it is the causes you have to combat, not the people. If a machine does not operate as intended, users will feel they have no choice but to intervene. In all probability, the machine will reciprocate some time with an accident. Which is not actually what is was designed to do! Restriction? Yes Secure hazards & No Indicate hazards Work with open safeguards and accepted risks Interlocking concept for safeguards. 3-29

110

111 4 Safe control technology

112

113 Chapter 4 Contents 4 Safe control technology Chapter Contents Page 4 Safe control technology Safety relays Overview of safety relays Structure and function of safety relays Relays and electronics Greater flexibility during installation Special features and functions Configurable safety relays Safety-related and non-safety-related communication Customer benefits from application blocks Today s safety control systems Overview of safety control systems Integration within the automation environment Safe decentralisation and enable principle Function blocks in safe control systems Using safety control systems to achieve safe control technology Overview Safe control technology Modularisation of the automation function Safe control technology in transition New safety technology requirements Complex yet simple no contradiction Outlook from static to dynamic safety

114

115 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4 Safe control technology In the early days of control technology, the focus in the control system was on the function and therefore the process image. Relays and contactors activated plant and machinery. Where there were shutdown devices or devices to protect personnel, the actuator was simply separated from the supply when necessary. However, people gradually realised that this type of protection system could be rendered inoperational in the event of an error: The protective function would no longer be guaranteed. As a result, people began to consider the options for safeguarding this type of separation function. Special relay circuits, such as the 3 contactor combination, were one of the initial outcomes of these considerations. These device combinations ultimately led to the development of the first safety relay, the PNOZ. Safety relays, therefore, are devices which generally implement safety functions. In the event of a hazard, the task of such a safety function is to use appropriate measures to reduce the existing risk to an acceptable level. These may be safety functions such as emergency off/emergency stop, safety gate function or even standstill monitoring on a drive. Safety relays monitor a specific function; by connecting them to other safety relays they guarantee total monitoring of a plant or machine. The first safety-related control system ultimately came from the desire to connect functions flexibly through programming, similar to the way this is done on a programmable logic controller (PLC). Safety functions for all requirements. 4-3

116 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays Configurable safety relays like PNOZmulti are a combination of safety relay and safety control system. Having considered the advantages and disadvantages of both systems, they combine the simplicity of a relay with the flexibility of a safety control system. Although the primary focus for safety relays and safety control systems is to monitor safety functions, the current trend is towards intelligent dovetailing of safety and automation functions within one system. 4.1 Safety relays Overview of safety relays Safety relays perform defined safety functions: For example, they: Stop a movement in a controlled and therefore safe manner Monitor the position of movable guards Interrupt a closing movement during access Safety relays are used to reduce risk: When an error occurs or a detection zone is violated, they initiate a safe, reliable response. Safety relays are encountered in almost every area of mechanical engineering, mainly where the number of safety functions is quite manageable. However, increasing efforts are being made to integrate diagnostic information into control concepts as well as overall concepts. That s why in future safety relays with communications interfaces will be more prevalent in plant and machinery. Safety relays have a clear structure and are simple to operate, which is why no special training measures are required. To use these devices successfully, all that s generally needed is some simple, basic electrical knowledge and some awareness of the current standards. The devices have become so widely used because of their compact design, high reliability and, importantly, the fact that the safety relays meet all the required standards. They have now become an integral component of any plant or machine on which safety functions have a role to play. Since the first safety relays were developed initially with the sole intention to monitor the emergency off/emergency stop function a wide range of devices have become established, performing some very specific tasks in addition to simple monitoring functions: For example, monitoring speeds or checking that voltage is disconnected on a power contactor. The devices are designed to work well with the sensors and actuators currently available on the market. Today, a safety relay is available for practically every requirement. With their diverse functionality, safety relays can implement almost any safety function, for example, monitoring the whole safety chain from the sensor to the evaluation logic, through to activation of the actuator Structure and function of safety relays Today s safety relays are distinguished primarily by their technological design: Classic contact-based relay technology With electronic evaluation and contact-based volt-free outputs Fully electronic devices with semiconductor outputs Nothing has changed in the fundamental requirement that safety relays must always be designed in such a way that when wired correctly neither a fault on the device nor an external fault caused by a sensor or actuator may lead to the loss of the safety function. Technological change has advanced the development of electronic safety relays, which offer much greater customer benefits: Electronic devices are non-wearing, have diagnostic capabilities and are easy to incorporate into common bus systems for control and diagnostic purposes. 4-4

117 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays Ch. 1 Ch. 2 E-STOP button Feedback loop + UB S11 S12 S22 Y1 Y2 Auxiliary N/C contact ***Safety contacts, positive-guided not permitted for safety circuits K2 K1 K3 K1 K3 K2 K1 K2 K1 K2 K3 C1 K3 S33 S ON button + UB E-STOP button Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Short circuit in E-STOP pushbutton Feedback loop S11 S12 S22 Y1 Y2 Short circuit in output contact Auxiliary N/C contact ***Safety contacts, positive-guided not permitted for safety circuits K2 K1 K3 K1 K3 K2 K1 K2 K1 K2 K3 C1 K3 S33 S ON button Structure and function of a safety relay. 4-5

118 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays The typical design of a first generation safety relay in relay technology is based on the classic 3 contactor combination. The redundant design ensures that wiring errors do not lead to the loss of the safety function. Two relays (K1, K2) with positiveguided contacts provide the safe switch contacts. The two input circuits CH1 and CH2 each activate one of the two internal relays. The circuit is started via the start relay K3. There is another monitoring circuit between the connection points Y1 and Y2 (feedback loop). This connection is used to check and monitor the position of actuators which can be activated or shut down via the safety contacts. The device is designed in such a way that any faults in the input circuit are detected, e.g. contact welding on an emergency off/emergency stop pushbutton or on one of the safety contacts on the output relay. The safety device stops the device switching back on and thereby stops the activation of relays K1 and K2. The reduced size enables more functions to be implemented in the same effective area. Selectable operating modes and times allow for flexible application of the devices. As a single device type can implement several different safety functions at once, savings can be made in terms of stockholdings, configuration, design and also when commissioning plant and machinery. Not only does this reduce the engineering effort in every lifecycle phase, it also simplifies any additions or adjustments that are required Relays and electronics The latest generation of safety relays operates using microprocessor technology. This technology is used in the PNOZsigma product series, for example, and offers further additional benefits over conventional relays. There is less wear and tear thanks to the use of electronic evaluation procedures and the diagnostic capability, plus the safety relays also reduce the number of unit types: One device can now be used for a variety of safety functions, e.g. for emergency off/emergency stop, safety gate (contactbased switches as well as switches with semiconductor outputs), light beam devices, light curtains and two-hand control devices. As electronic safety relays have a more compact design, they take up much less space. Electronic safety relays can be expanded in the simplest way possible. Whether you use additional contact blocks or function modules: Adapting to the specific requirements of the respective plant or machine is a simple, straightforward process, with contacts expanded via connectors. With just a single base unit, plus additional expansion units if required, users can fully implement all the classic functions. 4-6

119 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays Greater flexibility during installation For many years, wiring of the individual functions on safety relays was a complex, problematic procedure which had a negative impact on the installation process. Imagine the following situation on a machine: A safety gate is intended to prevent random, thoughtless access to a danger zone. Access is only possible once the hazardous movement has been stopped and the machine is in a safe condition, at least within the danger zone. However, the intention is for various drives to be operable at reduced speed, even when the gate is open, for installation and maintenance purposes for example. An enable switch has therefore been installed, which must be operated simultaneously. If these requirements are to be implemented in practice, so that the operator is protected from potential hazards, a substantial amount of wiring will be needed to connect the individual safety devices. As well as the actual protection for the safety gate, safety relays will also be required for the enable switch, to monitor Setup mode, and for the master emergency off/emergency stop function. Reduced purely to the logic relationships, the connections could look as follows: 1 & >= & Wiring example 4-7

120 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays If this application is implemented using classic contact-based devices, the design will correspond approximately to the diagram below: Wiring example using contact-based safety relays. The diagram shows that implementation via contact-based devices produces a result which is not entirely comprehensible; it is also very cost intensive due to the vast amount of wiring involved. In recognition of this fact, consideration almost inevitably turned to a simpler form of implementation, using logic connections between the safety relays. Thus started the development of a new type of device with integrated connection logic. Input & Input Output Output Less wiring due to linkable outputs. 4-8

121 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays Microprocessor technology opened up a whole new range of possibilities, as expressed by the predominantly electronic devices in the PNOZelog product series, for example. It laid the foundations for previously unimagined flexibility: One device can now be set for different application areas, another device for different safety functions. Unlike conventional safety relays, these new relays have electronic safety outputs and auxiliary outputs that use semiconductor technology. As a result, they are lowmaintenance and non-wearing and are therefore suitable for applications with frequent operations or cyclical functions. In addition to the actual basic function, such as monitoring a safety gate or an emergency off/emergency stop function for example, these devices contain a logic block with special inputs, enabling logic AND/OR connections between the devices. An output block with auxiliary outputs and safety outputs completes the safety relay. The following application example shows how the above example is implemented using electronic safety relays from the stated product series. Compared with a design using contact-based technology, the diagram is much clearer and the amount of wiring is drastically reduced. Wiring example using electronic safety relays. 4-9

122 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.1 Safety relays Special features and functions A key benefit of safety relays is their ability to specialise. They have a clear, self-contained task to fulfil, so specific customer requirements have led to a wide range of safety relays with particular functions and features: These include devices with muting function, with safe monitoring of speed, standstill and monitored disconnection, as well as safety relays with special properties for the Ex area. The examples below illustrate some of these functions Muting function Safety relays for the Ex area Some of the most hazardous plant and machines are those that manufacture, transport, store or process dust, flammable gases or liquids. Explosive compounds may be produced during these processes, which could present a danger beyond the immediate environment. Potentially explosive atmospheres like these require special devices, on which electrical sparking on contacts is excluded. Such safety relays must provide an intrinsically safe output circuit and volt-free contacts for potentially explosive areas. These devices are approved for Ex area II (1) GD [EEx ia] IIB/IIC. The muting function is used to automatically and temporarily suspend a safety function implemented via a light curtain or laser scanner for a particular purpose. A muting function is frequently used to transport material into and out of a danger zone. 2 4 II 3 GD E Ex na II (T4) Category 1 Zone 0/20 Category 2 Zone 1/21 Category 3 Zone 2/ Conforms to the standards EEX (EU), AEX (USA) Explosion-proof equipment Ignition protection Gas group Temperature class ATEX Directive on explosion protection. 4-10

123 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Similar to progress in the automation technology sector, safety technology has gradually developed from hard-wired relay technology to contact-based safety relays and devices with integrated logic function and beyond to flexible, configurable safety relays. The idea was to make safety technology more transparent and manageable for the user. This was the major driving force behind development of the devices and ultimately led also to the development of new types of configuration tools, which graphically display function and logic and then forward the configured setting to the relay via memory chip. The result is a high degree of flexibility for the responsible electrical design engineer; the plans only have to consider the number of digital and analogue inputs/outputs required. They can incorporate the functions at some later date and adapt them to suit the changed situation if necessary. At the same time, any work involved in wiring the logic functions also disappears. With this generation of devices, the safety functions and their logic connections are configured exclusively via the software tool. The manufacturer provides the safety functions within application blocks; certified bodies such as BG or TÜV will have already tested them for safety. With the help of safe application blocks and the logic connections between these blocks, the plant or machine builder creates the safety-related application they require, an application which they would previously have implemented by wiring contactors and relays in a laborious, time-consuming process. Contacts and wires are replaced by lines between the ready-made application blocks. An electrical circuit diagram showing the logic functions is no longer required. Logic connections between the blocks for simple configuration. 4-11

124 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Not only is it easy to connect the application blocks to each other, a simple click of the mouse is all it takes to adapt them fully to the requirements of the relevant application. Block properties define the behaviour of the individual blocks within the application: whether single or multi-channel, with or without automatic reset, e.g. when a safety gate is closed. Parameters that determine how a block will behave can be easily set in accordance with the application s safety requirement. Configure function elements The parameters available in the Configure Function Element window (see illustration) essentially mirror the familiar functions from the safety relays. They no longer have to be set laboriously on the device or be selected via jumpers; with the parameter tool everything operates in the simplest way possible. Users will find all the useful, proven elements from the world of the classic safety relays, just represented in a different format. This new configuration method has another quite simple, safety-related benefit: Once the configuration has been selected, it cannot easily be modified by unauthorised persons via screwdriver or device selector switch. Simple configuration of the required input and output modules, plus the availability of special modules for speed or analogue processing, enable the user to create a safety system that suits his own individual needs. Functions can be added or adapted later with relative ease. The user simply selects these modules from a hardware list and then creates the necessary logic functions. 4-12

125 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Safety-related and non-safety-related communication Communication on contact-based safety relays is very limited. Simply displaying fault conditions can sometimes prove difficult. Switching to electronic versions already makes communication somewhat easier: LEDs flash, sometimes with varying frequencies, to distinguish between specific malfunctions. LCD displays indicate errors and/or operating states in plain text. Configurable safety relays offer a whole new set of options: Fieldbus modules can be used to connect them to almost any fieldbus; they can even exchange safety-related data via special interconnection modules. This enables data to be exchanged with non-safetyrelated fieldbus subscribers, in order to share diagnostic data or transfer control commands to the configurable safety relay, for example. The ability to transfer data safely via special interconnection modules opens up new horizons: If several machines are working together in a network, for example, safety requirements will demand that safety signals are exchanged between the control systems. Previously, this could only be achieved by exchanging digital signals. This is a laborious process and is extremely inefficient due to the high cost for each piece of information transmitted. If interconnection modules are used to replace the previous hard-wired solution; the amount of wiring is reduced, while the amount of information data, including safety technology data, is increased. Multi-Link inside Connecting configurable safety relays. 4-13

126 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Customer benefits from application blocks Configurable safety relays offer a wide range of predefined application blocks. These blocks form the basis for implementing the safety technology requirements of plant and machinery. The availability of blocks for the widest possible range of applications and functions enables the user to implement his requirements quickly and effectively. Example: Sequential muting Muting phase 1: Material in front of the danger zone Light beam device active Muting lamp off Application blocks for muting function The muting function is one of those laborious functions which previously required the application of special relays, but which can now be implemented easily using configurable safety relays. This function is used to automatically and temporarily suspend a safety function, such as a light curtain or laser scanner. It is often applied, for example, to transport material into or out of a danger zone. A distinction is made between sequential and cross muting. Typical application areas include the automotive industry, on palletising and drink dispensing machines, or in the manufacture of stone products (concrete blocks, tiles etc.). Additional sensor technology is used to distinguish between persons and objects. Muting phase 2: Muting sensors 1 and 2 operated Light beam device suspended Muting lamp active 4-14

127 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Muting phase 3: Muting sensors 3 and 4 operated Light beam device suspended Muting lamp active Application blocks for press applications In addition to application blocks for individual functions, complete application packages are also available for specific self-contained applications such as mechanical and hydraulic presses, for example. Such packages are designed to perform control functions as well as meeting safety-related requirements. The package contains all the basic functions that a press needs, e.g. blocks for setup, single-stroke and automatic operating modes; monitoring a mechanical camshaft; run monitoring to monitor the mechanical transmission for shearpin breakage; monitoring of electrosensitive protective equipment in detection and/or cycle mode; monitoring and control of the press safety valve plus cycle initiation via a two-hand control device. Muting phase 4: Muting process ended Light beam device reactivated Muting lamp off Safe control and monitoring of presses. 4-15

128 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.2 Configurable safety relays Application blocks for the drive environment In addition to general safety functions such as monitoring of safety gates, emergency off/emergency stop function or light curtain evaluation, configurable safety relays also offer special expansion modules and specific application blocks for advanced options such as the safe detection of movement and standstill on drives. Two axes are possible per expansion module, each with eight limit values for speed monitoring, standstill monitoring and detection of clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation. In this way, motion information can be integrated directly into the safety system, irrespective of the drive system you are using. With normal standard encoders, monitoring is possible up to Category 3 of EN or Performance Level d of EN ISO This is significant for two reasons: Firstly, there is no need for expensive, safe encoders and secondly, laborious wiring is no longer necessary thanks to the simple listening function of the encoder signals tapping the encoder cable via a T-junction. The direct signal tap on the motor encoder minimises the work involved in the mechanical and electrical design through appropriate adapter cable for the widest range of drives. Speed and standstill detection, including evaluation via customised application blocks, is available in the simplest way possible, via plug and play Application blocks for safe analogue processing In the past, processing analogue signals safely using safety relays was as good as impossible. Only the integration of special expansion modules and the availability of customised application blocks has made safe analogue processing possible. In a similar procedure to that of the drive environment, configurable safety relays can be used to evaluate sensor information from the analogue process environment. This may relate to process conditions such as fill level, position or speed for example; there s practically no limit to the extended application options. For analogue signals it is also possible to define limit values, threshold values or value ranges, within which a measured value may move; this is done through the module configuration or by setting parameters in the user block. Reliable monitoring therefore becomes a reality; all values can be evaluated and further processed. Example: Range monitoring 4 20 ma current loop With range monitoring, the first step is to define the permitted value range. Depending on the selected condition ( greater than or less than ), the output for threshold value monitoring is set to 0 if the recorded value exceeds or drops below a range limit. 2 range limits are to be defined in this example: I < 3 ma monitors for open circuit and I > 21 ma monitors for encoder error Error if Condition Value Comment R1 < 3 ma Open circuit R2 > 21 ma Encoder error ma ma Example: Monitoring the position of a control valve via range monitoring Control valves in process technology, e.g. to control flow rates, are generally controlled in analogue; feedback on the valve position is also analogue. Without safe analogue processing, until now, only special switches have been able to evaluate position signals from valves. The new technology allows you to set as many valve positions as you like and to monitor compliance, safety and reliably. 4-16

129 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems Overview of safety control systems Safety control systems essentially came about because of the desire to connect safety through programming, in a similar way to that of a PLC control system. It s no surprise then, that safety control systems are following the example of the PLC world. Centralised systems came first, followed by decentralised systems in conjunction with safe bus systems. Programming followed the same formula, except that the instruction set was drastically reduced from the start to just a few languages, such as IL (Instruction List) or LD (Ladder Logic/ Ladder Diagram). These measures were taken for reasons of safety, for the opinion was that limiting the programming options would minimise the errors made in generating the program. Initial systems clearly focused on processing safety functions. Although even at the start it was possible to program the safety control system for standard automation, in practice this application found very limited use. Safety-related features aside, there is little to distinguish safety control systems from standard automation control systems in terms of their actual function. Essentially a safety control system consists of two PLC control systems which process the application program in parallel, use the same process I/O image and continuously synchronise themselves. It sounds so simple, but the detail is quite complex: Cross-comparisons, testing of the input/output level, establishing a common, valid result, etc. are all multi-layer processes, which illustrate the internal complexity of such systems. Ultimately, of course, the user is largely unaware of this; with the exception of some specific features, such as the use of test pulse signals to detect shorts across the contacts, modern systems behave in the same way as other PLC control systems. Structure of a safe control system: Two separate channels Diverse structure using different hardware Inputs and outputs are constantly tested User data is constantly compared Voltage and time monitoring functions Safe shutdown in the event of error/danger PII PII Channel A DPR Crosscheck Flag Counter Channel B PIO & PIO Elementary structure of a safe control system. 4-17

130 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems Integration within the automation environment Cycle times are becoming ever shorter, while productivity and the demands on plant and machine control systems are increasing. In addition to the technical control requirements, the need for information regarding process and machine data is constantly growing. As a result, communication technologies from the office world are increasingly making their mark on control technology. One consequence of this trend, for example, is the growth of Ethernet-based bus systems in automation technology, right down to field and process level. Until now safety technology has been characterised more or less as a monitoring function and has been incorporated as such into the automation chain. The process control system dominates and defines the actual process stages. As a monitoring instrument, the safety control system either agrees or disagrees with the decisions of the process control system. The diagram overleaf illustrates the principle: Monitoring is limited to safety-relevant control functions, as is the enable. Process outputs without a safety requirement are unaffected. A distinct benefit of such a procedure is the fact that the tasks, and therefore the responsibilities, are clearly separated. A separate system is responsible for the design and monitoring of the safety technology; another separate control system manages the machine and the process. This way it is possible to guarantee the absence of feedback: Changes made primarily in the standard control system will not adversely affect the safety control system. This is an essential safety requirement of a safety system. The division of duties also has a number of positive aspects: On the one hand, it increases overall performance, because each unit simply concentrates on the matters for which it has been designed and configured. Productivity increases do not just impact positively on the output of the plant or machine: They can also be beneficial in terms of handling, if faster reaction times enable safety distances to be minimised, for example. On the other hand, separation can be used to transfer responsibility for the individual systems to different individuals. That helps both sides, because everyone can concentrate on the task in hand. 4-18

131 PNOZ X POWER CH. 1 CH Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems S31 S32 S11 S12 S13 S14 A1 B B2 A2 Y31 Y32 S21 S22 S33 S34 Enable operating principle, with safety relay or safety control system. 4-19

132 PSS SB DI80Z4 SB Address x10 0 Power Supply 2 Supply 0 x1 3 Load Supply 4 Ground O0 I0 O1 I1 O2 I2 O3 I3 O4 I4 O5 I5 O6 I6 O7 I7 Load T 0 T 0 T 1 T 1 O0 I 0 O 1 I 1 O 2 I 2 O 3 I 3 O 4 I 4 O 5 I 5 O 6 I 6 O 7 I X X X7...8 X0 1...PowerX Ground X Load Supply X X4...8 PSS SB DI80Z4 SB Address x10 0 Power Supply 2 Supply 0 x1 3 Load Supply 4 Ground O0 I0 O1 I1 O2 I2 O3 I3 O4 I4 O5 I5 O6 I6 O7 I7 Load T 0 T 0 T 1 T 1 O0 I 0 O 1 I 1 O 2 I 2 O 3 I 3 O 4 I 4 O 5 I 5 O 6 I 6 O 7 I X X X7...8 X0 1...PowerX Ground X Load Supply X X4...8 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems Safe decentralisation and enable principle As explained already, in many cases safety technology follows the developments made in standard control technology. The benefits from transferring the input/output level to the field via decentralisation have resulted in the same process being applied to safety-related inputs and outputs. This was followed by the development of a safety bus system, which not only allows field inputs and outputs but also a safety-related connection between safety control systems. The diagram below illustrates a typical application in which the enable principle has been implemented. The safety control system switches the safetyrelated outputs, and the standard PLC transfers the switch command for the corresponding output to the safety control system via fieldbus. Essentially it is a really simple principle, if you ignore the disadvantage that the switch command from the standard control system must be considered in the program for the safety control system. Graphically speaking, the situation is this: The standard control system must place the switch command on the Standard (ST) Complete PII/PIO + diagnostic data Failsafe (FS) Switch commands for PSS enable SB active Device I/O-Group Supply Supply SB active Device I/O-Group Supply Supply ST outputs ST inputs FS outputs FS inputs PLC cycle ST bus PSS cycle SafetyBUS p Outputs Classic: & on control system Circuit diagram for the enable principle. 4-20

133 OFF ON SB ADDRESS 0 x PROFIBUS DP USB Usb SB Dev I/O Run BF PSSu H SB DP 5V Err PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E F 4DI 4DI 2DO 2 2DO 2 BSW Err 24V PSSu E F PS Err Err Err SW Err 24V Err PSSu E F 4DI Err FS Err FS1 PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E S PSSu E F PSSu E F PSSu E F 4DO 0.5 4DO 0.5 2DO 2 2DO 2 PS-P 2DO 2 2DO Err Err Err FS Err FS Err Err PSSu E F 4DI Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems fieldbus, from where the failsafe control system retrieves it before inserting it into the output s control program as an AND function. Programming becomes unclear, because the control task and safety function are mixed within the safety control system. A further development of the field transfer principle helps to simplify this case. The diagram below illustrates the extension of the enable principle. The enable for the control command from the standard control system now takes place directly at input/output level. Handling is simplified tremendously as a result; both control systems can be programmed and tested independently. Performing the enable in the I/O system means there are no delay times from processing within the safety control system, and it s no longer necessary to pass on the control commands via the fieldbus. Standard (ST) Failsafe (FS) ST outputs FS outputs ST inputs FS inputs ADDRESS x Standard (ST) Failsafe (FS) Parallel circuit Standard-Failsafe Outputs PLC cycle ST bus PSS cycle SafetyBUS p Outputs New: Logic I/O Extending the enable principle. 4-21

134 PNOZ X POWER CH. 1 CH Software di configurazione per la famiglia di sistemi PMI Licenza completa Numero d ordine: Software de configuración para la familia de sistemas PMI Licencia completa Número de pedido: Logiciel de configuration pour la gamme PMI Licence complète Référence : PNOZmulti Configurator PMI-PRO Configuration software for the PMI -Range Full licence Order Number: Konfigurationssoftware für die Systemfamilie PMI Vollizenz Bestellnummer: Baugruppennummer: CD-ROM Version SP7 Pilz English/Deutsch/Français/ GmbH & Co. KG, 2008 Español/Italiano CD-ROM Version Deutsch/English PVIS OPC Tools Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.3 Today s safety control systems Function blocks in safe control systems Function blocks for safety-related functions are the key to the success of safety control systems. Although initially they were more or less an image of the functions and properties found on safety relays, gradually the range has been developed to include blocks for special uses such as press applications or burner management. Today, function blocks are available for almost every conceivable safety-related application. All of these have been tested by certified bodies and offer users optimum safety for everyday use. The concept of function blocks was originally intended for the safety control system, but was then developed to form configurable function blocks for configurable safety relays as described, making applications more customer-friendly. This approach of using configurable function blocks will also be part of a continually developing programming environment for the safety control systems. The user can choose between classic programming e.g. in IEC and a configuration similar to that of the configurable safety relays. S31 S32 S11 S12 S13 S14 A1 B B2 A2 Y31 Y32 S21 S22 S33 S34 Certified function blocks in hardware and software. 4-22

135 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.4 Using safety control systems to achieve safe control technology Overview In which direction is safety technology developing? Which control systems provide the highest user benefits? How will the various disciplines of safety, control, motion, CNC and visualisation work together in future? Will it be possible to implement economical solutions, despite the increasing complexity? Even in future there will be a number of different approaches to take to resolve requirements. One potential approach is to modularise plant and machinery into functional units. This is already happening today, albeit primarily for the mechanical part of plant and machinery. This approach has only partially been used in control technology as yet. Whether the issue is safety-related or automation functions: The demands on plant and machinery continue to grow, so there s an increasing need for techniques which will allow applications to be well structured and therefore manageable. The requirement for minimum effort and associated cost reductions is increasingly the focus. The aim is to reduce engineering times still further. The graphic below illustrates the compromise that has previously been reached between minimum costs, maximum quality and rapid implementation: Minimum Effort/costs Performance/quality Maximum Adequate Earliest Duration However, excellent support during the engineering phase, through an appropriate programming model, a user-friendly programming environment and an extensive library, can lead to higher quality in shorter time and at a lower overall cost. 4-23

136 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.4 Using safety control systems to achieve safe control technology Safe control technology The model of safety technology as a pure monitoring function is changing drastically: Safety technology may have been almost exclusively associated with emergency off/emergency stop, safety gate, light curtains and interlocks for a long time, but it would now be unthinkable not to regard the issue of safety on drives, for example. Other areas will include safe pneumatics and hydraulics. Applications will emerge from areas which are not yet the focus of our attention, but one thing is clear: Safety is an integral part of the overall plant and machine function, so it must be considered appropriately, right from the start. In simple language, safe control technology means: Make the control function safe! Safe control technology becomes reality when safety enjoys the same mechanisms, the same handling and the same flexibility as the standard section, at all levels of automation technology. This does not mean that safety and standard functions have to be combined inside one device. What s important is that they work together to process tasks as a system, without impeding each other. Each device, each control system, should do what it does best. The system s backbone is an extremely powerful bus system, which manages data traffic in the background. The result of this technological development is a system which uses the intrinsic benefits of technology control systems. For example, it makes no sense for a safety control system to have to carry out motion functions, when that s a specific task of the motion technology control system. Safety and standard control functions combined in one system. 4-24

137 ADDRESS OFF ON x SB ADDRESS 0 x PROFIBUS DP USB Err Usb Dev 5V 24V SB I/O Run BF PSSu H SB DP PSSu E F PS PSSu E S 4DI Err PSSu E S 4DI Err PSSu E S 2DO Err PSSu E S 2DO Err Err 24V SW PSSu E F BSW ADDRESS OFF ON x SB ADDRESS 0 x PROFIBUS DP USB Usb SB Dev I/O Run BF PSSu H SB DP 5V Err 24V PSSu E F PS PSSu E S 4DI Err Err PSSu E S 4DI PSSu E S 2DO Err PSSu E S 2DO Err Err 24V SW PSSu E F BSW ADDRESS OFF ON PROFIBUS DP x SB ADDRESS 0 x USB Usb SB Dev I/O Run BF PSSu H SB DP 5V Err 24V PSSu E F PS PSSu E S 4DI Err Err PSSu E S 4DI PSSu E S 2DO Err Err 21 PSSu E S 2DO Err 24V SW PSSu E F BSW ADDRESS OFF ON PROFIBUS DP 0 x SB ADDRESS 0 x USB Usb SB Dev I/O Run BF PSSu H SB DP 5V Err 24V PSSu E F PS Err PSSu E S 4DI Err PSSu E S 4DI PSSu E S 2DO Err Err 21 PSSu E S 2DO Err 24V SW PSSu E F BSW Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.4 Using safety control systems to achieve safe control technology Ultimately however, this means that all the control systems have to be able to share access to the same data, without the user being required to organise it this way. The system must perform this task automatically in the background. In future, even the tools must have the same look and feel, plus standardised handling. Whether it s motion, control or visualisation: Handling of the various functions and tasks must be seamless Modularisation of the automation function Modularisation as an approach to solving the control technology requirement of the future ultimately involves division of the control technology into corresponding units or modules, and decomposition right down to the technology functions. Module A Module B Module C Module A Module Type A Module Type B Module Type C Module Type C Module Type A Modularisation of a machine and distribution of tasks across various control systems. Whatever can be decomposed mechanically can also be decomposed into single parts or components with regard to automation. A components-based approach must not be limited to individual stations (such as Modules A to C in the diagram, for example), but must extend right down to the individual function units (known as mechatronic units). Future applications will be implemented much more effectively if comprehensive libraries can provide these units as reusable component blocks. Even when division into modules and mechatronic units makes sense, it s important not to lose sight of the overall picture: Programming models which keep the units together and represent them as a whole are a much greater benefit to customers than those that merely provide components with interfaces and ultimately expect the user to look after these interfaces. 4-25

138 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Sometimes safety technology appears complex and confusing, but behind it is the ongoing quest for simple formulas : Safety must be simple, clear, traceable and verifiable. As a result, safety technology leaves little room for an unconventional approach to solutions; it is almost by definition a conservative part of control and automation technology. Innovative trends or flows are mostly introduced after somewhat of a time lag. This mindset is also manifested in the current perception that, if an error occurs or safety is called upon (for example if the E-STOP function is operated), safety technology must always shut down safely, by electromechanical means wherever possible and without using any additional electronic components. What is this perception based on? Safety technology is intended to protect man from all hazards emanating from plant and machinery. As such, safety technology is informed by norms and standards like almost no other sector. Last but not least, if regulations and specifications are presented in a way that is transparent, making it simpler to understand how they are implemented, this also helps to achieve safety. The usual formulas and perspectives may still apply and essentially still make sense, but safety control systems are also undergoing a massive transition in the course of general technological progress. Even in the past, safety technology has continuously adapted to circumstances in control technology: How else would we have today s safety solutions, which would have been totally unthinkable in the eighties and would not have conformed to the standards at that time because only electromechanical solutions were permitted. Electronic safety solutions only came into use gradually following extensive test procedures carried out by notified bodies (TÜV, BG, etc.). Modern manufacturing techniques require new technical approaches; process and manufacturing cycles are constantly changing. Clearly, safety technology must keep pace with developments in the automation technology sector. Customers expect innova- tive products and solutions with integrated safety concepts that increase productivity, support efficient work processes and create additional benefits New safety technology requirements What are the challenges facing safety technology today? Current requirements for greater flexibility in configuration and programming or for increased communication, for example, are already being taken into account. There are other requirements, however, which cannot yet be identified explicitly, nor do they have a name. Henry Ford once said If I d listened to my customers I wouldn t have built cars, I d have bred stronger horses. This illustrates the point that successful developments should not be geared solely at superficial needs but must always deal with the core requirement. Far-sighted vision is required if innovative products and solutions, in the true sense of the word, are to be the end product. If you transfer this insight to safety technology it is clear that the formulas commonly used today cannot solve the tasks of the future; companies need to offer new solutions. Even today, in many companies safety operates by removing power to every drive, even the whole plant, once a protected zone has been accessed. With increasing productivity requirements, however, it must be possible to access defined detection zones in a plant without having to halt the entire production process. At the same time the safety of the operator must be guaranteed. That s why the demand is for intelligent, dynamic safety solutions. In future, to react to a safety-related event with a total shutdown can only be regarded as a last resort. 4-26

139 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition With some justification, a whole new generation of safety control systems is expected from safety technology manufacturers in future. Compare it with your car, where assistance functions are increasingly used to help drivers and offer additional safety (features such as distance monitoring and automatic speed reduction); in the same way, useful, extra safety-enhancing features will increasingly make their mark in mechanical engineering. An example from forming technology, where servo presses are becoming increasingly important, clearly illustrates the changed requirements: On conventional presses a mechanical rotary cam arrangement was enough to control the safety of the stroke movement, but the motion sequence on servo presses is fundamentally different. A press stroke is no longer the 360 rotation of an eccentric cam but a pendulum movement between variable angle settings. Previously well-tried procedures can no longer guarantee safety on such applications; the demands on the evaluation device are much more complex than before. Stroke (mm) max. Slide stroke with servo pendulum mode Slide stroke without servo mode Cycle time reduced 0 Time (s) Slide stroke with and without servo mode. The graphic examples are intended to show that in future, safety technology will need to make wideranging calculations in order to meet the specified requirements. Safety control systems must be able to record, process and output complex measured variables. The necessary means to do this are significantly different to anything currently available. It involves not only the sensors and actuators, but above all the processing logic functions, for which simple instruction sets are no longer sufficient due to the increased requirements. To summarise, plant and machine processes are becoming more complex and dynamic due to the demands that are placed on them. Safety technology of the future must take these changed requirements into account. Servo press with slide stroke. Safety function in accordance with EN with sensor, logic and actuator. 4-27

140 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Complex yet simple no contradiction The classic, widespread view of safety technology today revolves mainly around safety functions such as those illustrated below. Common functions are those such as emergency stop, safety gates, twohand control, operating mode selection, valve control, monitoring the direction of rotation or rotary cam arrangement; these cover the majority of the required safety functions. They are basic functions, which are needed on almost every machine, whether in this form or similar. Where safety on plant and machinery is limited to basic functions, there will still be a requirement in future for simple safety control systems, on which a manageable number of safety functions can be implemented simply. That is one of the strengths of configurable safety relays such as PNOZmulti: Programming could not be simpler, using graphic symbols and drag and drop. This has now become the state of the art; indeed it has practically been the market standard since the turn of the millennium. To date, PNOZmulti has been both role model and technological forerunner within this device class Configurable safety relays continue to develop Safety functions on an eccentric press. Originally, the configurable safety relay device class was intended for 4 to 10 safety functions. However, because the tool and hardware were so easy to handle, applications that were originally the reserve of genuine, high-performance safety control systems have gradually been migrating to the configurable safety relays. In principle, that does not present a problem, provided the devices meet the requirements. However, the user is increasingly confronted with the fact that the relay is reaching the limit of its capabilities. That s because some wide-ranging configurations can be developed, to such an extent that even the programmer is at risk of losing oversight. At this point a contradiction can quickly arise: The more you add to the functionalities reproduced in the configurable relays, the more you lose oversight and the benefit of simple usability. But the latter is exactly what the user values. 4-28

141 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Latest generation configurable relays What distinguishes the latest generation of devices such as the PSSu multi from established devices such as the PNOZmulti? The new devices are significantly more powerful than today s configurable relays and constitute a whole new device class of configurable safety control systems. The new generation of devices differs from its predecessors in two key areas: The ability for expansion with additional data types is a fundamental feature. The devices cannot only handle Boolean variables but can also process any form of data type, just like fully fledged control systems. The graphic options have also been extended so that complex composite data structures can be displayed graphically on individual lines in the Editor. This promotes clarity, without losing important information. PNOZmulti SAFEBOOL PASmulti SAFEBOOL SAFEBYTE SAFEWORD SAFEDWORD SAFESINT SAFEINT SAFEDINT SAFEUSINT SAFEUINT SAFEUDINT Another fundamental change concerns the program structure. From the perspective of a PLC control system it is customary for programs to have a hierarchical structure. Programs contain function blocks, which in turn call up functions or blocks. A feature of configurable relays is that the program is displayed on a single plane. To date it has not been possible to reproduce the hierarchical structures familiar from PLC control systems. It is a sensible solution for simple applications, indeed it has contributed to the success of this device class. However, this type of programming soon becomes confusing when applications are more complex. Now this feature has been added to the device class of configurable safety control systems. Program sections can be combined into one block, making the program clearer, without losing any of the information contained in the program section. If a function is created in the customary flat format, it can be selected and merged into a new block. The new block inherits all open interfaces as its external interface and can be opened, expanded or modified by double-clicking on it. As a result it is possible to view the block s internal structure at any time. Comparison between PNOZmulti and PSSu multi data types. 4-29

142 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Layer 4 Layer 3 Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 1 Hierarchical grouping with configurable relays. 4-30

143 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Integration of automation and safety technology Today s safety control systems are characterised primarily by the ability to program them freely, in a similar way to a standard PLC. However, there are some restrictions. To ensure that programs remain clear and understandable, on most systems the instruction set and/or number of available editors is restricted. This hasn t been a problem, and indeed isn t a problem, provided plant and machinery only require simple safety measures. However, a structural transition is currently taking place regarding safety technology requirements. Processes are becoming increasingly dynamic, there is a greater need for controlled access to the process and productivity requirements are higher, so safety technology is gradually changing as a result. In the future, the previous strategy of shutting down safely when the safety function is called upon or when an error occurs will no longer be acceptable. Safety technology must open up to innovative processes, as currently illustrated by examples of safe drive functions. Safe stop 1 (SS1) Safe speed range (SSR) Safe stop 2 (SS2) Safe direction (SDI) Safe operating stop (SOS) Safe brake control (SBC) Safely limited speed (SLS) Safe brake test (SBT) Drive-integrated safety with PMCprotego DS. 4-31

144 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition But that s just the beginning! Step by step, safety technology needs to become a permanent feature of automation technology, as is already the case with drive technology with dynamic speed or standstill monitoring. Future safety concepts will need to be much more dynamic, including functions such as torque monitoring, based on the position of one or more axes. The available safety control systems will only partly satisfy these new requirements. Instruction sets will be required that can meet the need for dynamisation of safety functions. And yet programming will still need to be built on simple, manageable base elements that enable a safe programming procedure, as required by the IEC standards, for example. Ultimately, modern safety control systems offer a sensible combination of the programming procedure from a PLC and the configuration benefits from the configurable safety control system device class. Specifically this means that today s safety control system needs to have a large number of editors. The instrument that the user is handed shouldn t span only one octave, but if possible should cover the whole audible range. Care should be taken to ensure that the editors also meet the needs of the various industries and target groups. Complex safety functions should be capable of being created and tested in a high level language. After the test phase it must be possible to convert to a graphic display Outlook from static to dynamic safety Changes are happening at system level as well as device level. The signs are beginning to emerge in the safe drive technology sector. Previously, the safety function was connected to the control system but now it is distributed, i.e. the function migrates to the local function controller, for example the drive. At the same time, separation of the safety and control functions is becoming increasingly fuzzy; the control function could ultimately be safetyrelated. Looking at today s plant and machinery it is clear that not only have safety technology requirements changed, both in the number of safety functions and the way in which they are linked, but that the desire for more flexible solutions continues to grow. Why is this? The main factor behind what have sometimes been major changes in engineering over the past few years has been the trend of replacing mechanics with electronics. In addition to economic considerations this has also brought new degrees of technical freedom, which are now reflected in the safety technology requirements. In the past, safety was primarily influenced by static events such as the operation of an emergency stop device, the opening of a safety gate or the interruption of a light curtain, but the focus today is on requirements that enable the safety function to react in a way that s tailored to the machine s dynamic processes. Reactions are no longer triggered only by simple logic connections, but by complex states or results of intricate calculations, to which the safety function must react appropriately. 4-32

145 Chapter 4 Safe control technology 4.5 Safe control technology in transition Dovetailing function/safety PSS 4000 Complexity PNOZ PNOZmulti PSS 3000 PSSu PMCprotego S Static safety Dynamic safety Static and dynamic safety. How does this affect developments in safety technology? Dynamic safety needs the control function to dovetail closely with safety. That s why it s necessary to think more in terms of systems. If subfunctions are to fit seamlessly together, functions cannot simply be superimposed, they must be an integral part of the overall system. Developments in the control technology sector have already seen functions executed across device boundaries; similar developments will also become established in safety technology. Ultimately, the challenge lies in integrating the functions into the overall system. With highly complex dynamic tasks, insular solutions will generate no added value. 4-33

146

147 5 Safe communication

148

149 Chapter 5 Content 5 Safe communication Chapter Content Page 5 Safe communication Basic principles of safety-related communication Principle of decentralised safety technology Handling communication errors Principle of redundancy Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p System description SafetyBUS p Security measures Technical details Separation of safety-related and standard communication Certification Diagnostics Communication media Industries, applications Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Why Ethernet in automation technology? System description SafetyNET p UDP/IP-based communication with RTFN Hard real-time communication with RTFL CANopen application layer Safe communication via SafetyNET p Safe communication in the OSI reference model Safe telegram structure Safe communication in distributed control systems Application example of a modular machine design

150

151 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.1 Basic principles of safety-related communication Safety-related communication has replaced the long tradition of parallel wiring in many of today s mechanical engineering applications. There are many reasons for this: It reduces complex wiring, simplifies diagnostics and troubleshooting and increases the availability of the whole application. The following chapter explains how safe communication operates, using SafetyBUS p and SafetyNETp as an example, and also demonstrates some applications Principle of decentralised safety technology Depending on the desired safety level, periphery devices such as E-STOP switches are generally connected to a safety control system in a dualchannel configuration. The redundancy and additional cable tests mean that faults such as short circuits or open circuits can be detected and managed. A bus cable uses single-channel, serial communication, which does not provide physical line redundancy. That s why additional measures in the protocol are needed to uncover faults such as a disconnected bus cable or communication problems. Principle of decentralised safety technology Handling communication errors The sections below describe typical errors and measures which may occur when safety-related data is communicated via an industrial communication system, and ways in which these can be handled Message repetition Malfunctions within the bus subscriber can lead to telegram repetition. Each message is given a sequential number so that repeated messages are detected. The receiver is expecting the sequential number, so it will detect repeated telegrams and initiate appropriate measures. 5-3

152 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.1 Basic principles of safety-related communication Message loss Messages may be deleted as a result of a malfunction on a bus subscriber or the receiver may stop receiving telegrams because the bus cable has been disconnected, for example. The receiver uses a sequential number to detect the loss of data packets. A timeout on the receiver also monitors the latest time by which a new message must arrive. Once this timeout has elapsed, the receiver is able to bring the application to a safe condition Message insertion Additional messages may creep in as the result of a malfunction on a bus subscriber. As with message repetition, the sequential number can be used to detect and manage this situation Incorrect message sequence Errors on a bus subscriber or on telegram-storing elements such as switches and routers can corrupt the telegram sequence. However, this will be detected through the sequential numbers Message corruption Malfunctions on a bus subscriber or faults on the communication medium, e.g. problems due to EMC, can corrupt messages: A data security mechanism (check sum) applied to the safety-related telegram content will recognise this and detect the corrupted message Message delay A malfunction on the bus subscriber or an incalculable data volume in the bus system can lead to delays: A timeout on the receiver will detect the delays and initiate appropriate measures Combining safety-related and non- safety-related communication functions In mixed systems containing safety-related and non-safety-related subscribers, receivers will sometimes interpret a telegram from a standard subscriber as a safety-related telegram. Such mistakes on the part of the receiver can be avoided using measures such as unique IDs across the network and varied data security features for safety-related and non-safety-related messages. Measures per message Error Sequential number Timeout ID for transmitter and receiver Repetition Loss Insertion Incorrect sequence Message corruption Delay Combining safetyrelated and non-safetyrelated messages Data security Errors and measures, using SafetyNET p as an example, taken from BIA GS-ET 26. Varied data security for safety-related and nonsafety-related messages 5-4

153 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.1 Basic principles of safety-related communication Principle of redundancy In order to control potential errors when recording and processing safe signals in bus subscribers, each function is processed by at least two different components or methods, which monitor each other. When an error is detected, these components or methods are used to bring about a safe condition. On the safe bus system SafetyBUS p, for example, the application software is processed by redundant microprocessors, which compare their respective results before transferring them to the redundant SafetyBUS p chip set. This then generates the actual safety-related message. CAN-Transceiver CAN-Controller SafetyBUS p Chip A SafetyBUS p Chip B BIP MFP AP Redundant hardware, using SafetyBUS p as an example. 5-5

154 PSS SB ETH-2 RUN ST RUN FS POWER AUTO PG ST SPS PG F-STACK RUN FS STOP PG USER 24 V 0 V 0 V T 0 T 1 I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 ETHERNET LINK 10/100 BASE T ON OFF R TRAFFIC T (USER) LINK 10/100 BASE T TRAFFIC STATUS SB STATUS SB PSS PWR X0 3 1 X SB ADDRESS 0 x USB Err Err Err Err Err Err Err Err Usb Dev 5V 24V 24V FS0 FS1 FS0 FS1 5V 24V FS0 FS1 FS0 FS1 SB I/O FS2 FS3 FS2 FS3 PSSu H SB DP Run SW BF PSSu E F PS PSSu E F 4DI PSSu E F BSW PSSu E F 4DO PSSu E F 2DO PSSu E F PS PSSu E F 4DO PSSu E F 2DO X0 A 6 x A Power Supply 2 Supply 3 Ground 4 Ground 1...PowerX1...4 Device-Address: I/O-Group: Bit: I/O-Group: Bit: A B PSS SB BRIDGE Device-Address: A B 1...PowerX2...4 B 6 x B PSS SB ETH-2 RUN ST RUN FS POWER AUTO PG ST SPS PG F-STACK RUN FS STOP SAFE BREAK HIGH ALIGN LOW ALIGN POWER ON OPEN FOR SETTING RECEIVER 24 V 0 V 0 V T 0 T 1 I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 PG USER ETHERNET LINK 10/100 BASE T ON OFF R TRAFFIC T (USER) LINK 10/100 BASE T TRAFFIC STATUS SB STATUS SB PSS PWR X0 3 1 X1 9 SAFE POWER ON EMITTER X0 A 6 x A Power Supply 2 Supply 3 Ground 4 Ground 1...PowerX1...4 Device-Address: I/O-Group: Bit: I/O-Group: Bit: A B PSS SB BRIDGE Device-Address: A B 1...PowerX2...4 Presse 2 Presse Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 80 Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor Basisdruck Basisdruck 10 0 Temperatur Temperatur A1 B1 C1 D1 A2 B2 C2 D2 A3 B3 C3 D3 A4 B4 C4 D4 S1 B 6 x B Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p The function and application of a safe fieldbus is explained below, using the popular safety-related fieldbus system SafetyBUS p as an example. Standard fieldbus or Ethernet Bus connection To next x A B x network SB active A Device A I/O - Group A Supply A Wireless multipoint up to 10 km Wireless optical up to 70 m Fibre optical up to 10 km x A B x SB active A Device A I/O - Group A Supply A Supply B I/O - Group B Device B SB active B Supply B I/O - Group B Device B SB active B x IP V with 24 VDC System overview of SafetyBUS p 5-6

155 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p System description SafetyBUS p SafetyBUS p is a communication standard for the implementation of safety-related applications in industrial automation technology. SafetyBUS p has been proven in thousands of applications since its launch in The system is used exclusively for the communication of safety-related data. The underlying communication is based on the CAN communication standard. The physical properties on SafetyBUS p, such as the linear bus structure, maximum cable length and number of subscribers, are the same as on CAN. A wide range of devices are now available for connection to SafetyBUS p. These include safety control systems, digital inputs and outputs, light curtains and drives. Structural components such as routers, bridges and active junctions are available for flexible network configurations Security measures The following security measures are implemented on SafetyBUS p in order to detect communication errors: Counters Addresses Acknowledgements Time monitoring (timeout) Connection monitoring Cyclical polling with timeout Safe hardware Redundant and diverse chips CAN telegram 11 bit Identifier 6 bit DLC max. 8 byte User Data 16 bit CRC 1 bit ACK SafetyBUS p Application Layer Transmitter/receiver address Priority Counter 32 bit Safe data 16 bit Safe check sum Detects - Mixing - Repetition - Insertion - Loss - Incorrect sequence - Corruption SafetyBUS p telegram 5-7

156 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p Technical details Up to 64 safe devices can be implemented within a network using the multimaster system SafetyBUS p. This can even be extended to up to 128 subscribers if networks are interconnected, enabling 4,000 inputs and outputs per network. Further technical features: Guaranteed error reaction times up to 25 ms Safe usable data per telegram: 32 bit Maximum cable length: Copper cables: 3.5 km; fibre-optic: 40 km Multiple networks can be safely interconnected Gateways to standard fieldbuses Optional supply voltage via bus cable Separation of safety-related and standard communication On SafetyBUSp, safety-related data is communicated separately from standard data, via separate bus cables. This division makes troubleshooting easier when faults occur. It also increases the system s availability, as there s no feedback between standard and safety-related communication. The reduced bus load also leads to faster reaction times. There is a clear allocation of responsibility for the data. As a result, unwanted or accidental modifications in the standard section will not influence the safety-related section. The restriction to a purely safety-related system means that complexity is low, which simplifies the engineering and approval process. Separation of safety and standard. 5-8

157 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p Certification Notified bodies such as TÜV and BG have approved safe communication via SafetyBUS p for use in safety-related applications in accordance with the following standards: SIL 3 in accordance with IEC PLe in accordance with ISO SIL 3 in accordance with IEC Diagnostics Diagnostic information from the subscriber is made available to the Management Device, which is usually a safety control system. The safety control system can provide this information to established standard communication systems such as Profibus DP, CANopen or Ethernet/IP, for example Communication media A wide range of communication media is available to SafetyBUS p, enabling it to satisfy the varied application requirements. Communication may therefore be copper, wireless, light or fibreoptic-based Fibre-optic communication With fibre-optic (FO) communication, fibre-optic cables, transmitters and receivers are used instead of copper cables. Fibre-optic routers are used on SafetyBUS p for this purpose. For safety control systems with SafetyBUS p interface, the fibre-optic routers are totally transparent, i.e. copper-based communication can simply be swapped for fibreoptic communication, without having to reconfigure the control system. SafetyBUS p has a number of different devices for creating fibre-optic paths. Fibre-optic converters can be selected for glass fibre paths from 4 to 40 kilometres, depending on the application. Integrated routing functions enable network segmentation. As a result, different transmission rates are possible within the segments connected via FO. The FO router also filters messages in SafetyBUS p, so that they only reach the segments for which they are intended. This reduces the network load in the remote bus segment. Today, FO communication is found in a wide range of applications. It s important where a high EMC load would disrupt communication, as would be the case with welding robots in the automotive industry, for example. Fibre-optic paths are also used for safety-related communication between the mountain and valley stations on cablecars, where it s necessary to span long distances outdoors. This technology is also used to reduce reaction times in safety technology. On copper-based networks, the data transmission rate depends on the cable runs, so the reaction time of the safety technology increases with the length of the bus cable. This dependency is lower on FO-based networks, so a short reaction time is guaranteed, even over long distances. 5-9

158 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p Safe wireless communication SafetyBUS p data can be transmitted wirelessly using wireless routers. From the safety control system s perspective the wireless routers are transparent, i.e. they are not visible as subscribers in the network and therefore don t need to be configured. The wireless bus segment behaves in the same way as a segment connected via cable. Wireless transmission does not affect the safety level of SafetyBUS p. Safe wireless communication is used when it s necessary to span long distances between safetyrelated subscribers but it is too complex and therefore cost inefficient to lay cables. Another application would be mobile subscribers, on which the wearing sliding contacts are replaced by wireless transmission for data transfer. These may be rotating or linear-moved plant sections, such as those found on automatic guided vehicle systems or cranes. When safe wireless technology is employed, high demands are placed above all on the quality of the wireless connection, as this affects the number of telegrams that are lost and can cause safetyrelated shutdowns of the application. This in turn will impact on the application s availability. To guarantee the quality of the wireless connection, particular attention should be paid to selecting wireless and antenna technology that is appropriate for the application. Operating ranges of up to a kilometre can be implemented using an omnidirectional antenna, while up to 10 kilometres are possible with a directional antenna. Safe wireless communication 5-10

159 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p Industries, applications Today, safe bus systems such as SafetyBUS p are used worldwide in a wide range of industries and applications. The list below represents only a selection Automotive industry The automotive industry uses SafetyBUS p to safeguard and control presses. Applications range from small standalone presses to multi-stage transfer presses, demanding the very highest safety and performance requirements of a safety bus. Even on the conveyor technology, where the safety and reaction time requirements are not so high, safety-related fieldbuses are used to collect widely distributed, safe I/O signals such as E-STOPs. Robot cells are frequently found in the automotive industry and normally require safety gates, light curtains and E-STOP pushbuttons as safety equipment. With SafetyBUS p, multiple robot cells can be networked together and monitored via a safety control system. SafetyBUS p in a robot application. 5-11

160 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.2 Safe fieldbus communication with SafetyBUS p Airports Airports contain baggage handling and conveying technology applications in which long distances have to be covered. Safety-related equipment such as E-STOP pushbuttons and grab wires are distributed across the whole route. SafetyBUS p collects the safety-related signals and makes them available to the safety control system, which shuts down the drives safely if necessary Passenger transportation SafetyBUS p is also used for communication on cable cars: Safety-related signals are exchanged between the mountain and valley stations and signals are collected en route. Wireless or fibreoptic communication is used to cover the long distances. 5-12

161 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Why Ethernet in automation technology? Automation technology is currently developing away from a centralised control system with simple binary sensors and actuators into complex, intelligent systems. The proportion of control and process capacity within the sensors and actuators is constantly growing. This trend changes the communication requirements dramatically: Instead of the usual master/slave system that we see today, in future, more and more data will be exchanged directly between the network subscribers. Today s individual, largely passive bus subscribers will increasingly assume the function of bus masters, with their own computing capacity. Modern IT technology as seen in office communication with personal computers and office network technology such as switches, routers etc. currently offers a wide range of system components at favourable prices. There is huge potential for innovation. That s why users are increasingly keen to modify this technology to make it usable for industrial automation technology. Ethernet, which is practically standard in today s office communication, has a prominent role to play. When developing modern fieldbus systems, the aim in future must be to exploit the benefits of Ethernet to a greater extent. The installation of Ethernet systems must become simpler; compared with current fieldbus systems, Ethernet in its current form is still too complex. The requirements of the individual elements of a production plant also continue to grow. This affects scan times, precision/frequency of measurements, data amounts and processor power, to name but a few. As far as the automation system is concerned, the performance of the process computer and communication systems must satisfy these growing requirements. As a modern, Ethernet-based fieldbus system, SafetyNET p meets these new requirements. At the same time, SafetyNET p is as simple to install and as reliable as today s available fieldbus systems System description SafetyNET p Safety-related communication via Ethernet is explained below, using the real-time Ethernet communication system SafetyNET p as an example. SafetyNET p is a multi-master bus system, i.e. all devices on the network have equal rights. The bus scan time of SafetyNET p can be adapted to suit the application requirements Security The protocol includes a safe data channel, which is certified for data transfer in accordance with SIL 3 of IEC Both safety-related and non-safetyrelated data is transferred via the same bus cable. Non-safety-related subscribers have direct access to safety-related data and can use it for further non-safety-related processing tasks. 5-13

162 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Flexible topology and scan time selection SafetyNET p is extremely flexible, not just when it comes to selecting a suitable bus scan time, but also on the issue of the appropriate topology: The multi-master bus system supports linear, star, tree and ring topologies. The RTFL communication principle (Real Time Frame Line) is suitable for intra-cell communication, as it allows the fastest scan times. A minimum bus scan time of 62.5 μs can be achieved. Jobs and events can be recorded and executed with high precision across the entire network. Absolutely essential for real-time applications: A jitter of around 100 ns can be achieved in real-time control loops. As a result, it s even possible to use SafetyNET p in a frequency converter control loop between a rotary encoder and a speed regulator. Other highly dynamic applications are also possible, of course. RTFN mode (Real Time Frame Network) is used at higher levels, as it offers maximum coexistence capability with existing services Application layer The interface with the application is made via widely-used CANopen technology. Existing CANopen devices can be converted to SafetyNET p devices simply by changing the transport layer Standard Ethernet technology SafetyNET p uses Ethernet technology. The interface depends on the required performance level: If fastest possible communication is required, the RTFL communication principle is used, which is based on Ethernet OSI Layer 2 (MAC Frames). For communication via mixed Ethernet-based networks, from cell to cell or in general networks, UDP/IP communication is used. Conventional, standard Ethernet infrastructures can be used if the performance is satisfactory. This includes connectors, cables, routers, switches, gateways or communication channels. Company network TCP/IP PC PC Server PC PC Machine network RTFN Machine communication RTFL/RTFN SafetyBUS p Drive bus RTFL Sensor/actuator level SafetyBUS p PLC RTFL real-time Machine 1 Machine 2 HMI Machine 3 Drive controller PLC PLC PLC PLC I/O PLC PLC Drive RTFL real-time RTFN RTFL SafetyNET p in the communications hierarchy. 5-14

163 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p UDP/IP-based communication with RTFN The RTFN transport layer of SafetyNET p can be used at process control and manufacturing cell level, where standard Ethernet protocols are in demand and the real-time requirements are lower. RTFN is used to network the RTFL real-time cells and to connect standard Ethernet subscribers, such as visualisation devices or service PCs. The RTFN level typically has a tree topology as used in office communication, i.e. with conventional Ethernet. Switches are used to connect the network subscribers in individual point-to-point connections. RTFN can use two different mechanisms: The Ethernet MAC frame is used in closed networks. The devices are addressed directly via their MAC address. Then there s the UDP protocol, which is available on most office PCs. In this case, the devices are addressed by their IP address. If IP-based communication is used, the RTFN frames may also be routed from network to network. OSI Layer Internet File Download Precision Time Protocol Domain Name System RTFN RTFL 7 Application 6 Presentation HTTP FTP SMTP PTP DNS 5 Session 4 Transport TCP UDP 3 Network IP 2 Data link MAC 1 Physical PHY SafetyNET p in the ISO/ OSI reference model. 5-15

164 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Hard real-time communication with RTFL The RTFL transport layer of SafetyNET p is optimised for the fastest real-time applications. Typically the devices are networked in a linear structure, as with traditional fieldbus systems. All the bus subscribers have equal rights. Data is exchanged in accordance with the publisher/ subscriber principle. As a publisher, each device can provide data to the other devices (subscribers) via SafetyNET p. In turn, these subscribers can read the published data from individual subscribers or all subscribers. This way it is possible to exchange data efficiently between all the subscribers. The communication mechanism used by RTFL is a very fast cyclical data transfer in one single Ethernet data frame or multiple data frames per cycle. Communication is initiated by a special device called the Root Device (RD). The Ethernet frame generated within the Root Device is then transferred to the other devices (OD Ordinary Device). The ODs fill the Ethernet frame with data to be published and extract from the Ethernet frame the data to be read. The devices are addressed via their MAC address. Each RTFL network requires just one Root Device. Each RTFL device has two Ethernet interfaces, which enables the familiar daisy chain wiring often found on fieldbuses. Publish RJ45 RD OD OD OD Publish Subscribe Publish Subscribe Publish Subscribe Publish Subscribe RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Subscribe SafetyNET p RTFL communication 5-16

165 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p CANopen application layer The application layer of SafetyNET p adapts the mechanisms of CANopen to the conditions of SafetyNET p. CANopen is an open, manufacturerindependent fieldbus standard specified/standardised by CiA ( CAN in Automation). SafetyNET p therefore has a standardised application layer for industrial applications. This includes the standardisation of communication, i.e. the technical and functional features used to network distributed field automation devices and standardise application objects via device profiles. The SafetyNET p application layer is largely based on the CANopen standard. The changes that have been made are mainly in the communications area and in the way safe application data is handled. The key element in CANopen is the object directory, which acts as the interface between the application and the communication subsystem. Essentially it is a grouping of objects and functions, which can then be stored and called up as application objects. The integration of safety functions into the application layer means that the object directory, as the interface to the safe application, needs to be redundant in design. Generally, there are two possibilities for communication between devices: Application data can be merged into process data objects/pdos (mapping) and then published via the communication system. This is achieved via the cyclical data channel in SafetyNET p. The second possibility is the SDO ( service data object), which is used for acyclic data and is applied when setting control system parameters, for example. A wide range of device profiles have been developed for CANopen. For example, profiles for digital and analogue I/O devices or drives. By using the CANopen application layer it is possible to use these in SafetyNET p. Communication Object directory Application PDO SafetyNET p SPDO SDO SSDO Index 6000 h h Object Process environment SafetyNET p CANopen device CANopen object directory 5-17

166 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Safe communication via SafetyNET p SafetyNET p can also communicate safety-related data through an integrated safe communication layer. The security mechanisms are designed to meet up to SIL3 of IEC The safety-related data is sent encapsulated within SafetyNET p telegrams. As a result, all other network components such as switches or cable may be standard Ethernet components, which have no impact on safety. Even non-safety related network subscribers such as PCs or standard control systems, for example, have no impact on safety-related communication. As a result it is possible to mix the operation of safety and non-safety-related devices within a network. On SafetyNET p, safety-related objects are stored in a safe object directory, similar to the CANopen object directory Safe communication in the OSI reference model On SafetyNET p, the safe application layer is implemented in Layer 7, the application layer of the OSI reference model. Cyclical, safety-related objects are communicated via safe process data objects (SPDO). SPDOs are mapped on the cyclical data channel, the CDCN, and sent in defined intervals. When necessary, acyclical, non-time-critical safety-related data is sent as SSDOs ( safe service data objects) via the MSCN ( Message Channel). Application Safe device profiles Application Layer 7 Non-safetyrelated objects Safe service data objects Safe object directory Safe process data objects Transport Layer 4 UDP IP MSC Acyclical data channel CDC Cyclical data channel Data link Layer 2 MAC Physical Layer 1 PHY Safety layer in the OSI reference model. 5-18

167 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Safe telegram structure Cyclical data in SafetyNET p is communicated as safe PDOs (SPDOs) and has the following format: PID ( Packet Identifier): Used with the SID for unique data packet identification Length: Complete length of packet in bytes Process data: Safe process data SID (Safe ID): 16 bit unique network-wide ID, through which both the sender and the SPDO are uniquely identifiable Counter No.: 8 bit cyclical counter for life sign monitoring on subscribers CRC: 32 bit check sum covering the whole safe data packet PID Length Process data SID Counter No. CRC Packet identifier Packet length Process data SPDO-Produce identifier Cyclical lifesign counter Check sum Safe PDO message Safe communication in distributed control systems The publisher/subscriber communication principle is used universally on SafetyNET p. To enable the publisher/subscriber approach to also be used for safe communication, some new security mechanisms have been developed for SafetyNET p. For example, telegram delays can be managed by a runtime measurement initiated by the receiver. The advantage over previous standard solutions is that the transmitter of the message does not need to know the receiver. So the publisher/ subscriber approach can also be applied in safety technology, which enables distributed, safe control systems. 5-19

168 Chapter 5 Safe communication 5.3 Safe Ethernet communication with SafetyNET p Application example of a modular machine design Plant and machinery are becoming increasingly modular. This means that they are being segregated into mechatronic units with separate functions. In a concept such as this, the electrical engineering follows the mechanical structure of the machine, bringing wide-ranging benefits. Once the machine modules have been developed they can be reused in various machines, which ultimately reduces the development effort. Modules can also be manufactured separately and joined together only during final assembly. What s more, modules can be developed in isolation from each other, so tasks can be run in parallel, saving time during development. This type of engineering follows the buildingblock principle and enables customised solutions to be implemented at lower cost. Current fieldbus systems prevent this modular approach, as they are mainly based on a centralised master/slave approach. In safety technology in particular, one central instance is usually available: the Master. The publisher/subscriber communication principle applied universally on SafetyNET p does not use a central instance, thereby enabling a modular machine design. Modular machine design 5-20

169

170

171 6 Safe motion

172

173 Chapter 6 Contents 6 Safe motion Chapter Contents Page 6 Safe motion Definition of safe motion Basic principle Safe isolation of the motor from the energy supply Safe motion monitoring Safe limit value specification Standard EN Safety functions Stop functions and their standard reference Safety functions in accordance with EN System examination Drive electronics Motor Safe logic Safe braking Motion monitoring Motion control Implementation examples Examples of safe motion Performance level of safety functions Reaction times of safety functions

174

175 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.1 Definition of safe motion Safe drive functions have recently made their mark on standards, products and applications and today can be considered as state of the art. They are part of the functional safety of plant and machinery and, as measures that boost productivity, are increasingly gaining ground in the market. The protection of machinery and equipment is also increasing in importance alongside personal protection. When you examine the application of the failsafe principle within classic safety functions, initiation of the safety function causes the outputs to shut down, and this is called a safe condition. If safe drive functions are used, an application may look like this: When a safety gate is opened, the motor is braked safely with a defined ramp and then remains at standstill under active control. The motor will then move in jog mode at safely reduced speed. In other words: If static detection zone monitoring has been violated, production can continue at a reduced number of cycles and with safely monitored movements. What this simple example illustrates is the transition from static to dynamic safety. Dynamic means something different in the various disciplines. In safety technology, dynamic is understood to be the ability to adapt the safety functions to the changing detection zones. The functional safety requirements for variable speed drives specified in EN/IEC open up new horizons on this issue. The main requirements of safe drive systems in terms of dynamic safety are: Safe monitoring of kinematic variables such as acceleration, speed, distance, for example Short reaction times to reduce stopping distances Variable limit values, which can be adapted to suit the runtime Drive-integrated safety technology, fast, safe drive buses, high-performance programmable safety systems and safe camera systems are all products suitable for high-end safety solutions. The term safe motion is interpreted differently, depending on your perspective. Drive manufacturers generally understand safe motion to be drive-integrated safety, whereas control manufacturers associate it with external solutions. Looking at the issue analytically we can establish that the term safe motion only refers in the first instance to the implementation of a safe movement. Comparison of static and dynamic safety. 6-3

176 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle The objective of safety technology has always been to prevent potentially hazardous movements. Nothing, then, is more obvious than to dovetail safety technology with motion generation. For technical and economic reasons, the drive electronics servo amplifiers and frequency converters have remained non-safety-related components within automation. So safety is guaranteed through additional safe components, which bring the drive to a de-energised, safe condition in the event of a fault, or safely monitor the movement of the connected motor. The current market trend is to integrate these safe components into the drive. In accordance with the current state of the art, a safe motion controller is a combination of safe motion monitoring, safe isolation of the motor from the energy supply and non-safety-related motion generation. Non-safety-related motion generation Motor Safe separation Safe monitoring Components used in safe motion control. Safe motion control The following details refer to three-phase drive systems, as currently used in an industrial environment. To apply them to other actuator systems (e.g. DC drives, servo valves, ) is only possible under certain conditions and needs to be examined separately Safe isolation of the motor from the energy supply Before explaining the different shutdown paths on a converter it s necessary to understand the fundamental mode of operation. Converter Supply Rectifier Intermediate circuit Inverted rectifier Motor Power element Control element Control system Reference variables Control loops Pulse pattern Optocouplers Converter s fundamental mode of operation. 6-4

177 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle Internally a converter is divided into a control element and a power element. Both elements are galvanically isolated from each other via optocouplers. The power element is where the power fed in from the mains is prepared. A terminal voltage with variable amplitude and frequency is generated from the mains voltage and its constant amplitude and frequency. First of all, the sinusoidal mains voltage in the rectifier is converted into a pulsating DC voltage. This is smoothed through a downstream capacitor also known as an intermediate circuit. The intermediate circuit is also used to absorb the braking energy. The inverted rectifier then generates an output voltage with sinusoidal fundamental wave through cyclical switching of positive and negative intermediate circuit voltages. The converter s control element uses reference variables to generate pulse patterns, which are used to drive the power semiconductors on the inverted rectifier module. There are several shutdown paths that can be used to isolate the motor from the energy supply: Shutdown path Device Technology 1 2 Mains isolation Mains contactor Isolation of supply voltage to the converter Motor isolation Motor contactor Isolation of the motor terminal voltage 3 Drive-integrated isolation Safe pulse disabler Isolation of the control signals to the power semiconductors 4 Isolation of reference variable Setpoint setting to zero Control system does not generate control variables (processor-based) 5 Isolation of control variable Control enable No control signals are generated for the power semiconductors. Supply Setpoint specification Control loops Output stage enable Motor Output stage 3 Converter s shutdown paths. 6-5

178 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle If the energy supply is isolated via the mains or motor, the mains or motor contactor must have positive-guided contacts. If the N/C contact is linked to the start signal on the converter, an error on the contactor contact will be detected. The highest category can be achieved if two contactors are connected in series and each is fed back to the N/C contacts. The disadvantage of mains isolation is that the intermediate circuit capacitor on the power element is discharged each time power is isolated and must be recharged when restarting. This has a negative impact on restart time and machine availability and also reduces the service life of the intermediate circuit capacitors, because the charge/discharge processes accelerate ageing of the capacitors. If the motor was isolated, the intermediate circuit would stay charged, but disconnecting the motor cable for wiring the contactor is a very complex process, so it is only rarely used in practice. Also, the use of motor contactors is not permitted on all converters. Potential overvoltages when isolating the contacts may damage the inverted rectifier. If there is a frequent demand to isolate the energy supply as a safety function, there will also be increased wear on the positive-guided contacts on the mains or motor contactor. Isolation of the reference variable (setpoint specification) or control variable (output stage enable) can be combined with the above shutdown paths. As the setpoint specification and output stage enable are frequently processor-based functions, they may not be used in combination, so that common cause failures are excluded. The drive-integrated solution is based on the principle that the pulse patterns generated by the processor are safely isolated from the power semiconductors. On the drive systems examined in this case, motor movement results from an in-phase supply to the winding strands. This must occur in such a way that the overlap of the three resulting magnetic fields produces a rotating field. The interaction with the moving motor components creates a force action, which drives the motor. Without the pulse patterns, no rotating field is created and so there is no movement on the motor. The optocouplers, which are used for galvanic isolation between the control and power element within a converter, are ideally suited as a shutdown path. For example, if the anode voltage of the optocoupler is interrupted and combined with the isolation of the control variable (control enable) mentioned previously, motor movement is prevented through two-channels Safe motion monitoring Motion is described through the kinematic variables acceleration, speed and distance. As far as potential hazards are concerned, torques and forces also play a key role. The above variables are covered by the safety functions listed in the standard EN/IEC The implementation of safety-related monitoring is heavily dependent on the sensor technology used within the system. The sensor technology used within the drive technology is generally not safety-related and must be monitored for errors. For example, a critical status would occur if the rotary encoder was unable to supply a signal due to a defect, while power is applied to the motor and it is accelerating. 6-6

179 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle Moved axes in safety-related applications need redundant positional information in order to carry out relevant safety functions. There are various ways to obtain independent position values: One possibility is to detect the defect through a second encoder. In this case, a safe component would have to monitor both encoders and guarantee that the plant is switched to a safe condition if an error occurs. Sometimes the advantage of this solution is that the two encoder systems detect the movement at different points on the machine and so can detect defective mechanical transmission elements. Rotary encoders generally have several signal tracks, enabling them to detect direction or defined positions within a revolution, for example. These signals can also be consulted for feasibility tests, so that a second encoder system is not required. However, this is not a universal dual-channel structure as the movement is recorded from a shaft or lens. Dual encoder systems are also now available on the market. Such systems are suitable for functions such as safe absolute position. With a strict, diverse, dual-channel design it is even possible to achieve SIL 3 in accordance with EN/IEC In addition to an optical system, a magnetic sensing system may also be used, for example. In terms of costs, however, an increase by a factor of two to three is to be expected compared with a non-safety-related encoder system. Multi-turn encoders offer a more economical solution; they set their separate multi-turn and single-turn tracks in proportion and can therefore detect errors. In this case, safety-related preprocessing takes place within the encoder system itself. Another option is to use motor signals: By recording voltages and/or currents, calculations can be used to indicate the mechanical movement of the motor. A comparison with the encoder signals will uncover any dangerous failures. Encoder signal Description Initiator signal: generated by scanning a cam or cogwheel, analogue signal with TTL, 24V level. Two analogue signals, 90 out of phase, either square or sinusoidal (level: TTL, 24V, 1Vss). Digital interface, which transmits coded positional information (SSI, fieldbus). Digital motor feedback interface with additional analogue signals (EnDat, Hiperface, BiSS). Safe digital interface, which transmits coded positional information (SafetyNET p, CANopen Safe, PROFIBUS and PROFINET with PROFIsafe,...). Standard encoder interfaces 6-7

180 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle Encoder system Description Safety integrity Standard encoder Evaluation of two signal tracks on a common lens. Low Two encoders Two totally separate channels, expensive. Very high or or One encoder and initiator or Two totally separate channels, expensive, imprecise. Average Safe encoder or or Two independent encoder systems in one housing, without safe pre-processing. High Safe encoder Two independent encoder systems in one housing, with safe pre-processing. High Safe encoder Dual-channel diverse structure in one encoder housing, with safe pre-processing. High Standard encoder and motor signals Two totally separate and diverse channels. Very high Encoder systems for safety-related applications. 6-8

181 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.2 Basic principle Safe limit value specification Safe motion monitoring requires not just safe motion detection but also the opportunity to specify limit values safely. The way in which this is achieved depends on the level of dynamics and the flexibility within the machine. Limit values Description Dynamics Constant Selectable Dynamic Fixed during commissioning and cannot be amended during operation. Possible to select/change the appropriate value from a fixed set of limit values during operation. Limit values are calculated and adjusted during operation. - o + Dynamic and static limit values. Relay-like systems often use constant limit values. For example, a fixed limit value can be defined by setting jumpers or via other setting options on the device. On safe control systems, multiple limit values can be defined via configuration or programming user interfaces. Selection can be made during operation via a safe I/O interconnection, through evaluation of sensor signals or through specification via a safe fieldbus, for example. Dynamic limit values can only be used in conjunction with a powerful, safe control system or a safe bus system with real-time capabilities. When combined with optical monitoring of the protected field in robot applications, for example, safe speed can be reduced based on the distance of the operator from the danger zone: The closer the operator comes to the danger zone, the slower the motors move. 6-9

182 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.3 Standard EN Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional: Part 5-2 of the standard series EN is a product standard for electrical drive systems with integrated safety functions. It defines the functional safety requirements for developing safe drives in accordance with the standard EN/IEC It applies to adjustable speed electrical power drive systems, as well as servo and frequency converters in general, which are dealt with in other parts of the standard series EN EN Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency a.c. power drive systems, lists a series of new terms, which are explained in greater detail below: PDS CDM BDM Supply Mains filter Transformer Inverted rectifier Motor Input device Control loops Definition of a power drive system (PDS) Power drive system (PDS) System comprising power equipment (power converter module, AC motor, feed module,...) and control equipment. The hardware configuration consists of a complete drive module (CDM) plus a motor or motors with sensors, which are mechanically connected to the motor shaft (the driven equipment is not included). PDS/Safety-related (SR) AC power drive system for safety-related applications. Complete drive module (CDM) Drive system without motor and without a sensor connected mechanically to the motor shaft; it comprises, but is not limited to, the BDM and expansions such as the feed module and auxiliary equipment. Basic drive module (BDM) Drive module consisting of a power converter module, control equipment for speed, torque, current, frequency or voltage and a control system for the power semiconductor components, etc. 6-10

183 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.3 Standard EN Manufacturers and suppliers of safe drives can demonstrate the safety integrity of their products by implementing the normative provisions of this part of EN This enables a safe drive to be installed into a safety-related control system by applying the principles of EN/IEC 61508, its sector standards (e.g. IEC 61511, IEC 61513, IEC 62061) or EN ISO This part of EN does NOT define any requirements for: The hazard and risk analysis for a specific application The specification of safety functions for this application The assignment of SILs to these safety functions The drive system, with the exception of the interfaces Secondary hazards (e.g. through failures within a production process) Electrical, thermal and energy safety considerations covered in EN The manufacturing process of the PDS/Safety-related (SR) The validity of signals and commands for the PDS/Safety-related (SR) 6-11

184 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Stop functions and their standard reference Stop functions are found on almost all machines. EN defines 3 categories of stop function for the various functional requirements: Stop category 0 Stop category 1 Stop category 2 A category 0 stop leads to an immediate removal of power to the machine actuators. Activation of the mains isolating device automatically triggers a category 0 stop, as power is no longer available to generate the movement. With a category 1 stop, power to the actuators is maintained to enable a controlled stop. Stop category 2 is used if power is required even in a stop condition, as power is maintained after the controlled stop. These stop categories should not be confused with the categories in accordance with EN ISO , which categorise structures with a specific behaviour in the event of an error. For speed-controlled drive systems, EN assigns stop functions to the stop categories listed in EN EN EN Stop category 0 Safe torque off (STO) Stop category 1 Safe stop 1 (SS1) Stop category 2 Safe stop 2 (SS2) Safety functions in accordance with EN Today s state-of-the-art technology enables stop functions to have a drive-integrated solution. This solution reduces the space requirement in the control cabinet and also the amount of wiring necessary, as additional external components required in the past, such as contactors, are now superfluous. Even additional components to monitor standstill or speed are now surplus to requirements. Servo amplifiers with integrated safety functions in accordance with EN are now available, providing much simpler solutions, even for complex safety requirements. The standard EN divides safety functions into stop functions and miscellaneous safety functions. The description is only rudimentary and allows a great deal of freedom in how it is implemented and interpreted. This is particularly evident with the stop functions, which are among the most complex of safety functions. The implementation method can vary greatly, but so too can the external behaviour of the safety functions. When the safety functions are operated in practice, subsequent effects can often be attributed to the poor quality of the sensor signals or to the actual behaviour of an electrical drive in general. Poorly tuned control loops and EMC are frequently the cause of restricted availability of safe drive axes. One example of this is the definition of standstill: On a closed loop system, zero speed is more of a theoretical value. Depending on the quality of the control loops, some jitter may be observed around the zero position; if the limit value was set to zero, this would immediately trigger a reaction on account of a limit value violation. The safety function would shut the drive down safely at the expense of system availability. In this case, it helps to define a standstill threshold > 0, where the permitted speed is still non-hazardous. An alternative is to define a position window, from which the motor may not deviate. In this case, even the slightest movements would not lead to a limit value violation. 6-12

185 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 safety functions To guarantee the security of the manufacturing and production process as well as the safety of personnel, safety functions may also be permanently active, without the requirement of the plant remaining in a special operating mode. Several components and their respective interfaces must be considered in order to implement the safety functions; the whole safety chain must be considered when calculating the required safety integrity. It is not mandatory for the safety functions listed in EN to be implemented using driveintegrated safety. An external solution may also be used. Safe sensor technology Drive controller Safe monitoring Safety gate Safe logic Drive controller Safe removal of power Safe monitoring Power element Motor Encoder Brake Power element E-STOP Operating mode selector switch Motor Motion Encoder Safety chain 6-13

186 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safe stop functions When considering safety on axes, the main factors are to prevent the axes from starting up unexpectedly and to shut down moving axes safely in the case of danger. The corresponding functions are summarised here under the heading of Safe stop functions. Safe stop functions Safe torque off (STO) The power to the motor is safely removed, so that no further movement is possible. It is not necessary to monitor standstill. If an external force effect is to be anticipated, additional measures should be provided to safely prevent any potential movement (e.g. mechanical brakes). Classic examples are vertical axes or applications with high inertia. This safety function corresponds to a category 0 stop (uncontrolled stop) in accordance with IEC If the function is triggered during operation, the motor will run down in an uncontrolled manner, which is not desirable in practice. That is why this function is generally used as a safe reset lock or in conjunction with the safety function SS1. Modern servo amplifiers include an integrated safe shutdown path, so safe devices are now available that prevent unexpected start-up and shut down safely in the case of danger. Safe torque off 6-14

187 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safe stop 1 (SS1) With safe stop 1 (SS1), defined motor braking is part of the safety function. When the motor is at standstill, the STO function is triggered. There are various options for implementing these requirements; the key factor is the dovetailing of safety technology and drive technology. This safety function corresponds to a category 1 stop ( controlled stop) in accordance with IEC Implementation Monitored time delay Automatic standstill detection with monitored time delay Monitoring of the braking ramp Description Triggering of the safety function starts an application-specific, safe time delay, after which the power is safely removed from the motor. Motor braking is a function of the non-safety-related drive technology. Should the motor accelerate during this time delay, it will not be detected. The monitored time delay is combined with standstill detection. If the motor reaches standstill before the time delay has elapsed, the STO function will be triggered. Here too, motor acceleration during the time delay will not be detected. A monitored braking ramp provides the highest quality in terms of functional safety. During the braking process, values are continuously compared with a limit value or a permitted drag error. If the limit value is violated, the STO function is triggered. In many applications, drives cannot simply be shut down because they would then run down slowly, which could cause a hazard. Also, an uncontrolled run down of this type often takes considerably longer than controlled axis braking. The safe stop 1 function (SS1) monitors controlled braking of the axis directly within the servo amplifier. Once the set braking ramp has run its course, the drive is shut down safely. The reaction times are reduced compared with external monitoring solutions; as a result, in many cases the safety distances to the danger points can also be reduced. This provides a number of benefits, such as improved ergonomics for the plant operator, space savings due to the reduced distance between the guards and the danger points and, last but not least, cost savings. Safe stop

188 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safe stop 2 (SS2) With safe stop 2 (SS2), defined motor braking is again part of the safety function. When the motor is at standstill, a safe operating stop (SOS) is triggered. Unlike safe stop1 (SS1), the motor at standstill is in closed loop operation. This means that the standstill position is held precisely, due to the active control loop. Again, there are several options for implementing these requirements. This safety function corresponds to a category 2 stop ( controlled stop) in accordance with IEC Implementation Monitored time delay Automatic standstill detection with monitored time delay Monitoring of the braking ramp Description Triggering the safety function starts an application-specific, safe time delay, after which a safe operating stop is triggered. Motor braking is a function of the non-safety-related drive technology. Should the motor accelerate during this time delay, it will not be detected. The monitored time delay is combined with standstill detection. If the motor reaches standstill before the time delay has elapsed, the safe operating stop will be triggered. Here too, motor acceleration during the time delay will not be detected. A monitored braking ramp provides the highest quality in terms of functional safety. During the braking process, values are continuously compared with a limit value or a permitted drag error. If the limit value is violated, the STO function is triggered, otherwise a safe operating stop will follow. So what are the benefits of the safe stop 2 (SS2) function? If the axes no longer need to be shut down at standstill, they will actively hold their current position, so the synchronisation between axes and process is no longer lost. As a result, the axes can be restarted immediately at any time, which clearly increases plant availability. Here too, the drive-integrated function leads to shorter reaction times, thereby minimising the risks. The monitoring functions response times have a direct influence on the potential channels available until a safety shutdown occurs. As the reaction times are used in the calculation of the safety distances, the benefits listed for the safe stop 1 function will also apply here. Safe stop

189 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safe motion functions Modern drive solutions not only examine how axes are switched on and off, but also look at the potential risks that may arise during operation of the axes. The functions employed to avoid/reduce these risks are summarised here under the heading of Safe motion functions. Application of the safe operating stop (SOS) function is generally intended for the standstill phases of a process. A typical situation would be access to a danger point during process intervention. An operator stops production using a command such as Stop at end of cycle, for example. Once the plant has stopped, the safe operating stop (SOS) function is activated, after which the guard locking device on the access gate is unlocked. The plant can now be accessed without risk. Safe motion functions Safe operating stop (SOS) The safe operating stop (SOS) has already been described with the safe stop2 (SS2) safety function. It monitors the standstill position while the motor is in a controlled loop status. Once the safety function has been lifted, the production or machining process can be continued with no loss of precision. This function is generally used in combination with a safe stop 2 (SS2) function, as standstill monitoring usually involves a braking process. As described above, the limit value can be specified as both a speed threshold and a position window. Safe operating stop Safely limited acceleration (SLA) and Safe acceleration range (SAR) Safety functions relating to acceleration monitoring are not widely used in the current state-of-the-art technology. In servo drive technology, Ferraris sensors are used to detect acceleration only in special applications of machine tools or printing machinery. Standard drives cannot process these signals in their control loops; monitoring of these acceleration signals is very complex in practice. 6-17

190 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safely limited speed (SLS) Safely limited speed (SLS) is probably the best known safety function. In practice, this safety function is often applied as safely reduced speed. As a result, a defined transition from the operating speed in automatic mode to the reduced speed in setup mode must be guaranteed. If the monitoring function detects that the limit value has been violated, the drive must be shut down safely. The manner in which the shutdown is achieved depends on the application; it is best to aim for defined braking using the SS1 function, followed by removal of power. Without drive-integrated safety functions, the implementation of this function was associated with high material costs or functional restrictions. Where axes are moved in jog mode during setup, the potential axis speed in the event of an error is a key aspect of any risk analysis. Operators must be protected from any hazard that would lead to an uncontrolled axis start-up in the event of an error. When the safely limited speed (SLS) function is used for these jog functions, the solution provides the shortest possible reaction time in the event of an error. This reduces the risks to the operator significantly, as any uncontrolled axis start-up would be detected at the onset and would result in a safe shutdown. Safe speed range (SSR) The safe speed range (SSR) can be used to monitor a safe minimum speed, for example. Again, the reaction that occurs when a value falls below the stated limit value depends heavily on the application. Drive axes may be coupled, in which case an appropriate reaction must be triggered when shutting down the drive (e.g. selective shutdown). Safe speed range (SSR) can generally be used for permanent process monitoring. Risks cannot always be eliminated just by limiting the capacity for speeds to suddenly increase. Speeds that reduce suddenly as the result of an error can also present a risk. If axes are operating at a defined distance, a speed that drops abruptly on just one of the two axes may create a risk of crushing. These are the cases for which the safe speed range (SSR) function have been defined and developed. This function would be used to shut down the relevant axes, thereby eliminating any hazard to the machine operator. Safe speed range Safely limited speed 6-18

191 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safely limited torque (SLT) and safe torque range (STR) Like acceleration monitoring, the problem with torque or force monitoring is the lack of suitable or established sensor technology. Torque measuring systems are not widely used on standard drives, but servo drive technology provides the option for indirect measurement via the motor current. The motor current is proportional to the motor s force or torque, so the hazard resulting from a hazardous movement is limited. Non-hazardous values as regards the effect of forces can be found in the limit value list 2003, in the BIA Report. Such a procedure may only be carried out via drive-integrated safety technology. Safely limited position (SLP) Safe position monitoring ensures that the motor does not exceed a preset position limit value. If a limit value is violated, the motor is braked using a safe stop. The stopping performance achievable from a technical point of view must be taken into account. Below the limit value there are no restrictions in terms of acceleration or speed of the motor. Absolute position detection is required for this safety function. Absolute encoders may be used or relative measuring systems may be combined with a safe reference run. Safely limited increment (SLI) The motor is allowed to travel a permitted distance following a start command. A safe stop function must be triggered once the limit value is reached. If the permitted distance is exceeded, this must be detected and the drive must be safely brought to a standstill. Encoder systems with relative measurement are sufficient for this safety function. Safe direction (SDI) This prevents the motor from moving in an invalid direction. This safety function is frequently used in combination with safely limited speed (SLS) in setup mode. Here too, the drive-integrated solution enables the fastest possible shutdown. Safe direction Safe cam (SCA) A safe output signal indicates whether the motor is positioned inside a specified range. These ranges are absolute position windows within a motor rotation. The basic function involves safe monitoring of absolute positions, which is why appropriate sensor systems must be used. Safe speed monitoring (SSM) The safe speed monitoring safety function (SSM) is very closely related to safely limited speed (SLS). However, if a limit value is violated there is no functional reaction from the components that are monitored, merely a safe message which can be evaluated and processed by a higher level safety control system. On one side the control system can perform more complex reaction functions, while on the other, the safety function can be used for process monitoring. 6-19

192 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Safe brake functions Functions related to holding brakes and service brakes have been summarised under the heading of safe brake functions. control (SBC) function is generally used to control the holding brake activated once an axis is at standstill. Safe brake control Safe brake functions Safe brake control (SBC) Safe brake control (SBC) supplies a safe output signal to drive an external mechanical brake. The brakes used must be safety brakes, in which a quiescent current operates against a spring. If the current flow is interrupted, the brake will engage. Control modules frequently include a power reduction feature when the brake is released to reduce energy consumption or brake heating. A safe brake test may be required to detect errors during operation, depending on the risk analysis. Holding brakes and service brakes are often used on axes with suspended loads. Along with the brake, the brake drive is another key component in terms of the safety function. The safe brake Safe brake test (SBT) Using the safe brake test (SBT) function can significantly increase safety. In many cases, simply controlling a holding brake safely is not enough to make a vertical axis safe. If the wearing, mechanical part of the brake is not maintained regularly, it cannot be guaranteed that the holding brake will apply the designated braking action in the event of danger. The safe brake test (SBT) function provides an automatic test which replaces previous measures that could only be implemented through organisational and manual operations; if the result is negative, it can bring the plant to a standstill and signal an error. This reduces maintenance work considerably. Safe brake test 6-20

193 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.4 Safety functions Maintenance Safe brake test (SBT) Muting Safe direction (SDI) Setup Safely limited speed (SLS) Operator intervention Safe stop 2 (SS2) Safety functions using the example of a packaging machine. 6-21

194 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination Safe drive technology merges two issues, which individually already involve a high level of complexity. The challenge is to provide the user with transparent, comprehensible logic in the lifecycle of a safe motion application. The difficulty in configuring and selecting safe drive components is in translating the various influencing factors to the product requirements. Or to put it another way: In selecting products for an optimum, safe drive solution, which parameters are to be derived from which specifications? Principles/specifications Parameters/criteria Concept/solution Components No. of axes Drive-integrated/ external monitoring Type of movement Encoder systems Machine design/ functionality Drive technology Ability to modify limit values Interfaces/ communication Risk assessment B standards C standards Safe drive functions Safety integrity Safe logic/ control technology Mechanical brakes Configuration Reaction times General requirements Retrofit or new development Drive electronics Procedure for configuring and selecting a safe drive solution. 6-22

195 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination The machine design and the functionality demanded by the end customer are essentially the factors that determine which drive technology will be used and how the machine will be operated in control technology terms. The resulting parameters are: How many drive axes are there? Does the system use servo amplifiers or frequency converters? Are the drives decentralised i.e. outside the control cabinet? Which safe drive functions are required and how are the parameters to be set? Does the movement to be monitored involve an elliptical curve, synchronous drive axes or, in the simplest case, a single movement? Specifications from the B and C standards and risk analyses will provide the safety integrity requirement (SIL and PL). These, of course, will also influence the required safety functions. The reaction times of the safe drive components are part of the overall machine design and must be fine-tuned as part of an iterative process. Factors such as stopping performance, safety distances, inertia of the moved mass or the reaction capability of the machine control system play a key role. General requirements may be whether or not the machine is to be retrofitted with safe drive functions, for example. In some circumstances, existing components must continue to be used, a situation which will often favour an external safety solution. These criteria and parameters must be converted into a concept. The result is a safe drive solution, made up of standard market components Drive electronics These days, modern frequency converters or servo amplifiers have an integrated safe shutdown path, through which the STO safety function can be performed. This shutdown path is generally accessible externally via a terminal pair and must be connected to 24 VDC. If the safety function is not in use, 24 VDC will be available permanently at the terminals. If the shutdown path is used as an STO or safe reset lock, the terminals must be connected to a safe output on a programmable safety system or safety relay. In this case, it is important to ensure that the test pulse on the safe output does not initiate the safety function. A countermeasure is to use an input filter with an appropriate time delay. Depending on the version, a feedback path is available for fault detection, to achieve greater safety integrity. The benefits of a drive-integrated shutdown lie mainly in the Reduced wiring requirement Rapid restart, as the intermediate circuit remains charged Short reaction time (measured from the falling edge at the input to the shutdown of the optocoupler, the reaction time is in the millisecond range) 6-23

196 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination Motor The relevant properties for the motor in terms of its use in safety-related systems are Type of movement (rotating, linear) Acceleration capability (inert asynchronous motor or air-borne linear drive) Integrated motor encoder Integrated holding brake incorporated into the safety concept The motor s acceleration capability influences the system s maximum permitted overall reaction time. Highly dynamic linear motors have extremely low electrical time constants on the winding and a high overload capability, so that a multiple of the rated power is present in just a few milliseconds. Resolvers are widely used as motor encoders in servo drive technology. They are used in rotating motors and are both robust and economical. The measuring system provides an absolute position within a motor rotation, but has limited resolution due to the function principle. Only rarely can resolver signals be evaluated by safe monitoring components. For this reason, motor encoder systems with sine/cosine analogue tracks are preferable in safety-related applications with motion monitoring. Motor encoder systems with an all-digital interface can only be monitored using special manufacturer-specific safety components. Third party products cannot be connected Safe logic Safety relays or programmable safety systems can perform the following tasks in systems with safe drive functions, depending on the application: Evaluation of sensors on safeguards Activation of safety functions Drive shutdown Evaluation of the status of safely monitored drive axes in a multi-axis system Establishing the plant s overall safety Specifying new limit values during operation Interface between the drive controller and the safety functions The safe logic can be implemented either as separate, external components or as drive-integrated components. Safe logic is the interface between the sensors on the protection equipment and the safe monitoring unit. Drive-integrated solutions enable simple functions in single axis systems to be implemented economically. Sensors are connected directly on the drive and are evaluated. The limited number of safe interfaces makes crosscommunication between the drives and complex logic links impossible. The cycle time of the safety control system must always be included in the assessment of the overall reaction time if pre-processing in safe logic is required in order to activate a safety function. Depending on the size of the user program, this ranges between ms and therefore dominates over the delay in the shutdown path. It s also necessary to consider a delay time on safe, digital inputs; this arises due to the input filters. 6-24

197 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination Safe braking Mechanical brakes must be used if the output shafts on motors or gearboxes are affected by forces that would trigger movement when the motor was shut down. Example applications are vertical axes or motors with high inertia. The operation of vertical axes is a special case as far as safety technology is concerned. The failsafe principle the removal of power to the drives in the event of an error is generally applied in safety technology, but in this case it would not lead to a safe condition because falling loads present a hazard. Mechanical brakes are incorporated to rectify this; their functionality must be constantly verified using special proof tests. As with the encoder systems, various versions are available to fit the specific safety requirements. Dual channel capability can be implemented either through two independent brakes or through a brake with two separate brake circuits. The advantage of two separate brakes is that faults can be covered within the mechanical transmission elements between the drive and the process. The brake configuration depends largely on the machine design and the overall safety concept Motion monitoring Motion monitoring has two main tasks: It must detect any violation of the limit values and then trigger an appropriate reaction function. It must also detect any potential errors on the encoder system and likewise trigger an appropriate error reaction function. Both functions are heavily linked to the availability of the drive system. Noisy signals or poorly tuned control loops can cause sensitive monitoring mechanisms to trigger reaction functions and therefore reduce plant availability. Proper screening of the motor and encoder cables is absolutely essential. The algorithms for the monitoring functions can be applied via hysteresis or filter settings. The reaction times for these components are in the millisecond range. Motion monitoring is available as both an external and a drive-integrated solution. An integrated solution has clear advantages over an external device in terms of wiring effort and convenience. Disadvantages are higher retrofitting costs for existing plants and dependence on the converter that is used. This means that the technical properties of the drive, as well as the interfaces and the performance of the safety functions, have to fit the application. With an external monitoring unit, safety functions can be implemented as standard on frequency converters and servo amplifiers of a different performance class or manufacturer. 6-25

198 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination Motion control With the current state-of-the-art technology, motion control is a non-safety-related drive component. Depending on the task, the functions are either driveintegrated or are performed by an external control system via fieldbus or drive bus. The classic allocation between the control systems depends on the required movement. Movement Controller Safe motion monitoring Positioning of a single axis Positioning control system Drive-integrated or external monitoring of single axis Electronic cam disk (synchronous motion) Elliptical curve (resulting motion) Motion control system Limit value and monitoring must be examined for each drive axis. The status conditions of the individual axes are evaluated in central, safe logic. NC or RC control system Safe, central calculation of the current position from the position of the individual axes Implementation examples Servo converters with drive-integrated motion monitoring and safe pulse disabler for shutdown Sensor evaluation is undertaken, for example, by a small, safety-related control system, which activates the safety functions in the drive via a safe I/O interconnection. The servo motor has an integrated sine/cosine motor encoder for motor control and positioning. The reaction time before the safety function is activated is around 60 ms, the reaction time when limit values are violated is <10 ms. Implementation example with servo amplifier. 6-26

199 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.5 System examination Safely monitored drive with frequency converter and asynchronous motor An incremental encoder is used to detect motion. A safety relay or a small, safety-related control system with motion monitoring evaluates the sensor signals and triggers an STO function in the event of an error. Implementation example with frequency converter. 6-27

200 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Performance level of safety functions Normative basis Several standards (generic safety standards and technical safety standards; type A and type B standards) are available for determining the safety level achieved by the safety-related section of a control system. EN ISO is generally applied in the engineering sector. For many machines, the safety level to be achieved can be taken from the respective machinery safety standards (type C standards); (e.g. presses EN 692, EN 693; robots EN ISO , packaging machinery EN 415). If there are no C standards for a product, the requirements can be taken from the A and B standards Safe stop function The safety function E-STOP when light curtain is interrupted is addressed here by the example below; it illustrates a safe stop function for a motordriven axis. The methodology described below is based on EN ISO and as such can only be applied if all the safety function subcomponents have their own performance level. Using the terminology of the standard, it is a series alignment of safety-related parts of a control system (SRP/CS). This example uses a light curtain, a configurable safety control system and a servo amplifier with integrated safety functions. A servo motor with feedback system is connected to the servo amplifier. The risk analysis permits a stop category 1 for the axis. Structure of the safety function. 6-28

201 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion PL low = PL e The block diagram shows the logical structure of the safety function, comprising the series alignment of the safety-related subcircuits. Determination of the performance level for the overall circuit EN ISO : Table 11 Calculation of PL for series connection of SRP/CS PL low N low PL a b c d e > 3 None, not allowed 3 a > 2 a 2 b > 2 b 2 c > 3 c 3 d > 3 d 3 e Note: The values calculated for this look-up table are based on reliability values at the mid-point for each PL. In the example of the safe stop function, all three components involved have performance level e. As a result, the lowest performance level of a safety-related subcircuit (SRP/CS) is also PL e. Using the standard s terminology, therefore, we have: 3 x SRP/CS each with PL e The lowest performance level of the 3 subcircuits (SRP/CS) = PL e and is assigned the parameter PL low The lowest performance level occurs in 3 subcircuits and so the parameter N low = 3 If you apply this information to Table11 of the standard, the result for the example is an overall classification of PL e. 6-29

202 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Safe stop function on vertical axes If you examine the potential risks on servo axes you ll see that a vertical axis is also a good example for increasing awareness of the mechatronic view. Removal of power is not enough to bring an axis to a safe condition. In many cases, the load s own weight is enough for the axis to fall. Mass and friction will determine the speed that occurs in the process. As part of the risk analysis, potential hazards are analysed in the various machine operating modes and as operators carry out their work. The required measures will then be derived from this analysis. With vertical axes, the measures that need to be taken will essentially depend on whether the full body of the operator can pass below the vertical axis or whether just his arms and hands are positioned below the vertical axis. Another aspect is the frequency and duration of his stay in the danger zone. All these factors are added up to give the performance level that the safety functions must achieve. Building on the Safe stop function example, a brake is added to the structure. Holding brakes and service brakes are both common. Structure of the safety function. 6-30

203 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion PL low = PL e The block diagram shows the logical structure of the safety function, consisting of the series alignment of the safety-related subcircuits. Determination of the performance level for the holding brake Here the user of EN ISO is confronted with one of the positive approaches of this standard. The standard not only enables examination of the electrical part of the safety function, but also of the mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic section. However, the holding brake used in this example does not have a performance level, as this is only available for intelligent components. The brake manufacturer can only provide a B10 d value, as he does not know how exactly his components will be used in the application and so can only make a statement regarding the number of operations before a component failure. The design engineer constructing the safety-related part of the control system must now calculate the time to a dangerous failure of the component. The B10 d value is not the only consideration in this calculation; the mean time between two consecutive cycles is also a key factor which influences the MTTF d value. n op MTTF d = B = 10d 0.1 x n op d x h x 3,600 s/h op op t Cycle The following assumptions are made, based on the application of the component: h op is the mean operating time in hours per day d op is the mean operating time in days per year t cycle is the mean time between the start of two consecutive cycles of the component (e.g. switching a valve) in seconds per cycle Assuming that the calculation of the MTTF d for the holding brake results in a value of > 100 years, this gives an MTTF d classification of HIGH. EN ISO provides a graph to make it easier to determine the performance level. To decipher the performance level from this graph the diagnostic coverage DC is required. To determine the level of diagnostic coverage it is important to know whether every conceivable error can be detected through tests. Based on this consideration, a high classification will be possible if a safe converter is used to drive the motor and the holding brake is always tested automatically before the danger zone is accessed. To do this, a torque is established with a factor of 1.3 to the brake s rated holding torque, before waiting for at least one second. If the axis holds its position during the whole test, it can be assumed that the holding brake is in good working order. On this basis, it is possible to define the diagnostic coverage at 99%. 6-31

204 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion 10-4 a 10-5 b 3x10-6 c 10-6 d 10-7 e 10-8 PFH/h -1 MTTF oc = low, MTTF oc = medium, MTTF oc = high Cat B DC avg = none Cat 1 DC avg = none Cat 2 DC avg = low Performance Level Cat 2 DC avg = med. Cat 3 DC avg = low Graph to determine the PL in accordance with EN ISO Cat 3 DC avg = med. 100 years 3 years 10 years 30 years Cat 4 DC avg = high If this information is applied to Table 11 of EN ISO for a simplified calculation, the result for the example is an overall classification of PL d. Unlike the example for the safe stop function (without brake), a reduction factor now applies: In accordance with EN/ISO , the achieved performance level is reduced by one level if the overall circuit contains more than three subcircuits with PL low. However, in this case, a detailed calculation using the achieved PFH D values can certainly result in PL e. This is where software tools such as the PAScal Safety Calculator come into their own. So we now have the following data: Category = 4 MTTF d = high DC = high If this data is applied to the graphic, PL e can be determined. Determination of the performance level for the overall circuit In the illustrated example of the safe stop function on a servo axis with holding brake, all four components involved have performance level e. As a result, the lowest performance level of a subcircuit (SRP/CS) is also PL e. Using the standard s terminology, therefore, we have: Safety Calculator PAScal 4 x SRP/CS each with PL e The lowest performance level of the 4 subcircuits (SRP/CS) = PL e and is assigned the parameter PL low The lowest performance level occurs in 4 subcircuits and so the parameter N low =

205 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Jog function with safely limited speed (SLS) These days, jog functions can generally be carried out while guards are open thanks to the safely limited speed (SLS) function. The respective application will determine the type of increment that can be classified as non-hazardous. It may be helpful to consult EN 349 and EN Structure of the safety function. PL low = PL e The block diagram shows the logical structure of the safety function, consisting of the series alignment of the safety-related subcircuits. 6-33

206 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Determination of the performance level for the overall circuit In terms of structure, the jog function with safely limited speed is similar to the safe stop function described in section The key difference lies in the pushbuttons used for the jog function and the impact this has on the calculation of the performance level. In EN ISO , pushbuttons (enabling switches) are given a B10 d of 100,000. The time between two operations (cycles) is the key factor in calculating the MTTF d. Calculation formula for MTTF d n op MTTF d = B = 10d 0.1 x n op d op x h op x 3,600 s/h t Cycle The following assumptions are made, based on the application of the component: h op is the mean operating time in hours per day d op is the mean operating time in days per year t cycle is the mean time between the start of two consecutive cycles of the component (e.g. switching a valve) in seconds per cycle Assumptions: B10 d = 100,000 h op = 16h/day d op = 220d/year Calculation MTTF d : t Cycle = 5 s MTTF d = years t Cycle = 3,600 s MTTF d = years As shown in the example with cyclical operation in 5 s intervals, even in the best case it is only possible to achieve PL c with a B10 d value of 100,000. This demonstrates very clearly that the application range for wearing components has a direct influence on the calculation of the performance level and therefore affects the achievable safety level. The design engineer must therefore look very closely at the application range of his components in the respective application. Even if EN ISO states 100,000 cycles for B10 d, there may well be special components with a higher B10 d value. If an application uses a pushbutton as an E-STOP command device, it will certainly not be operated constantly at 5 second intervals. The situation is completely different if a pushbutton is used as a command device for cyclic initiation of a machine cycle and has to trigger a safe stop once released. The values stated in the example may cause a problem if a higher performance level is required. 6-34

207 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Muting with safe direction (SDI) Structure of the safety function. PL low = PL e The block diagram shows the logical structure of the safety function, consisting of the series alignment of the safety-related subcircuits (SRP/CS). In conjunction with light curtains and a muting circuit, the safe direction function (SDI) has a positive effect on safety because the respective direction of the drive axis is monitored during the muting phase and a safe shutdown occurs in the event of an error. Determination of the performance level for the overall circuit The performance level corresponds to the result from the example of the safe stop function. 6-35

208 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Motion monitoring with external devices Drive-integrated motion monitoring is accompanied by external monitoring. In the simplest case, the drive has no safety function. A drive can be shut down in order to implement a safety function via conventional means, using contactors for example. However, today s drives often already have an STO function and can therefore implement a safe stop. So an upstream safety relay can ensure that the hazardous movement is shut down simply and safely. Actual safety-related motion monitoring takes place in the external monitoring component, however. The task of the external devices is to detect motion. The safety characteristic data of the employed sensors, e.g. rotary encoders or proximity switches, is significant in determining the safety level that can be achieved. Different solutions to suit the various requirements are available to monitor movements with external monitoring devices. At the highest level it is necessary to distinguish between so-called standard encoders and safe encoders. When standard encoders are used, it is important to determine whether one or two encoders are required. The following safety functions may be realised, for example, depending on the monitoring functions implemented in the external monitoring devices: Safely limited speed (SLS) Safe direction (SDI) Safe operating stop (SOS) Safe speed range (SSR) The following examples illustrate potential types of motion monitoring using external devices. For the sake of clarity, the examples only illustrate those motion monitoring components with the task of monitoring motion sensors such as rotary encoders or proximity switches. The basic calculation method corresponds to the one illustrated in the previous examples. 6-36

209 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion A, A B, B Motion monitoring with one standard encoder External motion monitoring with one standard encoder In this example, one standard rotary encoder as sensor is responsible for motion detection. Various combinations are possible in conjunction with the drive controller. The hazardous function is shut down via an STO function available within the drive. If it is only the monitoring device that evaluates the encoder signals for the safety function, i.e. the drive controller does not use an encoder or only uses a separate encoder, a maximum of performance level PL c can be achieved. This requires an encoder with MTTF d = high and classification as a well-tried component or Category 1, or alternatively direct classification as PL c. If the monitoring device evaluates the encoder signals while the drive controller for position control uses the same signals simultaneously, a performance level of up to PL d can be achieved. This requires an encoder with MTTF d = medium/high. The drive controller acts as an additional diagnostic instance for the safety function through the appropriate parameterisation and activation of drag error detection (incl. shutdown). A pure frequency converter (FC) without control function cannot be used in this case. The following safety functions are possible with the illustrated configuration: Safely limited speed (SLS) Safe direction (SDI) Safe operating stop (SOS) Safe speed range (SSR) Note: The safety functions that can be realised depend on the monitoring functions implemented in the external monitoring device. 6-37

210 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion A, A B, B Motion monitoring with redundant standard sensors External motion monitoring with standard encoder and proximity switch Generally speaking, two separate sensors for motion detection are required in order to achieve the highest safety level (PL e) with standard sensors. Depending on the external monitoring device, these may be two rotary encoders or, as shown in this example, one rotary encoder and an additional proximity switch. The corresponding values for MTTF d are required for the sensors. This enables the performance level to be calculated for the sensor subsystem, which consists of the encoder and proximity switch; this can then be used to calculate the performance level for the overall safety function. The hazardous function is shut down via an STO function available within the drive. The encoder signals evaluated by the monitoring device for the safety function can also be used by the drive controller for speed and position control. However, this is not absolutely essential for the safety function. The following safety functions are possible with the illustrated configuration: Safely limited speed (SLS) Safe direction (SDI) Safe operating stop (SOS) Safe speed range (SSR) Note: The safety functions that can be realised depend on the monitoring functions implemented in the external monitoring device. 6-38

211 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Motion monitoring with proximity switches External motion monitoring with two standard proximity switches Without a rotary encoder, safety-related motion monitoring can still be implemented using standard sensors in the form of proximity switches, even up to the highest safety level (PL e). As in the previous example, two separate proximity switches are required for motion detection. If common cause failures (CCF), due to EMC for example, cannot be excluded or managed on both proximity switches, the use of diverse components from different manufacturers or of different types is recommended. The corresponding values for MTTF d are required for the proximity switches. This enables the performance level to be calculated for the sensor subsystem, which consists of the two proximity switches; this can then be used to calculate the performance level for the overall safety function. The hazardous function is shut down via an STO function available within the drive. The following safety function is possible with the illustrated configuration: Safely limited speed (SLS) Note: The safety functions that can be realised depend on the monitoring functions implemented in the external monitoring device. 6-39

212 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion A, A B, B Z, Z Motion monitoring with safe rotary encoder External motion monitoring with safe encoder Manufacturers are increasingly offering safe encoders for motion monitoring tasks. These devices are designed specifically for use in safety functions and are certified accordingly. As a result, a performance level of PL d or PL e can be achieved, depending on the construction type. This is usually possible with just one encoder, i.e. there is no need for two devices, as is the case when standard components are used. However, safe encoders are not actually safe until they are combined with a safe monitoring device, because there are no diagnostic or feasibility tests implemented within the encoder. The use of safe encoders, therefore, requires detailed knowledge of the requirements for use in safety-related applications, as described by the manufacturer in the operating manual. The monitoring device must be able to meet these requirements exactly by performing the monitoring functions demanded by the device manufacturer. One test that is often demanded, for example, is the absolute value check for sin/cos encoders: sin²+cos²=1. If this check is not implemented within a monitoring device, the device cannot be used in combination with a safe encoder that requires such a check. To date there is still no uniform or even standardised interface for safe encoders, so the encoder manufacturers requirements for their products vary enormously. That s why it is absolutely essential that the safe encoder and safe monitoring device are totally compatible. In this example, the hazardous movement is shut down via the STO function available within the drive. The following safety functions can be implemented with the illustrated configuration: Safely limited speed (SLS) Safe direction (SDI) Safe operating stop (SOS) Safe speed range (SSR) Note: Details of the safety functions that can be realised depend on the monitoring functions implemented in the external monitoring device. 6-40

213 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion Safeguarding detection zones with a safe camera-based solution Until now, interaction between man and robot has largely been characterised by fixed safeguards. A modern camera-based solution offers a whole range of new options in this case. The detection zone covers all three dimensions; one single device meets every requirement when accessing a danger zone and also provides protection against climbing over and crawling under the detection zone. The detection zones can be individually configured and can also enable the speed of the active axes in the monitored zone to be reduced if anyone approaches. Sensing device FOC Control unit Structure of the safety function. 6-41

214 Chapter 6 Safe motion 6.6 Examples of safe motion PL low = PL e Block diagram of the safety functions. Determination of the performance level for the overall circuit The result is performance level d Reaction times of safety functions PL low = PL e Block diagram of the safety functions. Several boundary conditions are involved in calculating a safety distance. Determination of the reaction time in the case of external commands If an E-STOP pushbutton acts upon an evaluation device, its reaction time is added to the reaction time of the drive-integrated safety function. It will also be necessary to add the time needed to bring an accelerated axis to standstill: t reac = t multi + t PMC + t ramp t multi = Reaction time of the evaluation device is approx. 20 ms t PMC = Reaction time of the drive-integrated safety functions to external signals is 6 ms t ramp = Ramp time to standstill depends on the moved mass, speed and other applicationdependent data Determination of the reaction time when limit values are violated If a monitoring circuit on a drive-integrated safety function is activated, it will be necessary to add the time needed to bring the accelerated axis to standstill. t reac = t PMC + t ramp 6-42

215

216

217 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design

218

219 Chapter 7 Content 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design Chapter Content Page 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design Introduction to mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design Mechanical design Introduction Danger, hazard, risk Definition and implementation of safety measures Pneumatic design Introduction Well-tried principles and protective measures Circuit-based solutions Stopping and braking Circuit diagram and operating manual Hydraulic design Basic physical knowledge Advantages of hydrostatic power transmission Disadvantages of hydrostatic power transmission Definitions Relevant units General hydraulic relationships Structure of a hydraulic system Simple hydraulic circuit, upward movement Simple hydraulic circuit, downward movement Simple hydraulic circuit, speed Circuit diagram for simple hydraulic circuit Two-cylinder control systems with electric valves Two-cylinder control systems with sequence valves Series circuit Parallel circuit Differential circuit Speed control systems Drive pumps, fixed pumps Drive pumps, screw pumps Drive pumps, vane pumps Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Safety requirements in general Concept and design Additional safety requirements Establishing compliance with the safety requirements Safety-related parts of hydraulic control systems Control systems in accordance with Category B, Performance Level a Control systems in accordance with Category 1, Performance Level b Control systems in accordance with Category 2, Performance Level b Control systems in accordance with Category 3, Performance Level d Control systems in accordance with Category 4, Performance Level e Further example for control systems in accordance with Category

220

221 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.1 Introduction to mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design The role of safety technology in the design of plant and machinery is becoming ever more significant. Although machinery may have already been fitted with a high level of safety, with rising demands on efficiency and productivity, safety technology continues to develop on an ongoing basis. The new Machinery Directive has also contributed in this regard. The following three sections deal with the mechanics, pneumatics and hydraulics. However, all three drive technologies should also always be considered in combination with the electrical design. 7-3

222 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Introduction Engineers and designers have always done a good job. How else could you explain the remarkable level of safety on today s plant and machinery? The considerable, enduring maelstrom surrounding the EC Machinery Directive (MD) over the last few years has not actually been based on (safety) technology. It has been much more concerned with the fact that a member of the company s management team must now use his good name to guarantee that the supplied machine actually has the necessary level of safety demanded and, what s more, that this can be proved legally (key words are documentation and operation manual). However, it s important to get one thing straight: Our machines are still not always perfect, but they are continuously getting better. Evolution in safety technology does not mean the implementation of wholly new solutions; quite the opposite: Deficiencies provide the impetus for improvement and errors the premise for correction! Regarding terminology: In general parlance, the distinction between reliability and safety is not always clear. That is because both terms have some things in common: They refer to future events and deal with probability. From the perspective of work safety and the associated safety-related design, a distinction should be made between the two terms, using exclusive definitions: If a component (incl. module, machine or plant) does Safe development and design Safety for man and environment Successful product Fulfils the technical function Economical to manufacture and in use Clear development and design Simple development and design Ground rules for designing successful products. 7-4

223 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design not fulfil its intended function in compliance with pre-defined boundary conditions, it is deemed to be unreliable. If a component (incl. module, machine or plant) causes an accident involving bodily harm, it is/was unsafe. The meaning of reliable and safe can be derived from the reverse implication. The logical consequence from an accident is that you can only sensibly speak of safety (or lack of safety) if all the relevant considerations of the technical systems and their design treat humans as an inextricable component of the work system, realistically, with all their deficiencies Danger, hazard, risk Annex I of the EC Machinery Directive defines four mandatory steps as the basis for the design of safety-related machinery: 1. Systematically identify potential dangers in the design 2. Analyse hazardous situations when working with or on machinery (hazard analysis) 3. Estimate and evaluate the risks associated with the hazards 4. Implement and document all the safety measures necessary to manage the risk Regarding terminology: Viewed objectively, dangers can be regarded as an energetic or material potential that exceeds human limits and can spontaneously lead to health impairments or injuries of varying degrees of severity. Hazards arise as soon as there is the possibility of humans coinciding with danger in time and space, enabling an unwanted situation to arise. The effects of what happens as the hazard unfolds are subject to the relentless laws of nature. The term risk requires a new mindset. It represents the consequences for man and the environment of hazards that occur with varying frequency. The consequences may have various degrees of severity. The level of risk is still determined by whether technical or organisational countermeasures can or cannot be implemented. Statements of risk are calculated prognoses of potential future events, in other words, the result of human considerations and not therefore the laws of nature playing out. For design engineers it is important to know that the causes of danger lie in the effective parameters of material, energy and information. In other words, parameters they apply during the design process and which they can use to achieve a safe condition, via the same methods employed to design functional technical systems. The hazard from materials may not only arise from their chemical or biological properties. They can also adversely affect humans on account of their property as space-filling matter (geometry) in the earth s gravitational field: Wherever the geometric layout of the machine results in forced postures or when heavy loads have to be carried or transported by hand (strain on the spine). Energy: Every machine needs energy to perform its technological function. Any energy used to fulfil a work function can be hazardous to humans as soon as its impact is uncontrolled and exceeds certain energy densities. Information: A poorly designed information flow between man and machine, including the boundary conditions, can trigger behaviours which can endanger the machine user and others. In this context, the basic information parameter implies that human safety in work systems depends on the natural laws of information processing and human behaviour. As the basic parameters of material, energy and information are used in machinery, dangers can only emanate from these parameters. 7-5

224 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Risk evaluation Danger Level of the latent or actual energy-related/material damage potential Hazard Possibility of man coinciding with danger in time and space Man Limit values Frequency of occurrence Frequency of coincidence in time and space Deterministic Dangers Constant Stochastic Dangers Operating time Frequently during normal operation Seldom and brief Practically never Operating time Risk F R = S F Minor Bodily harm Serious S Protective options Reducing harm Technical Personal Context of risk evaluation. 7-6

225 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Effective parameter Effect Examples 1 2 No. 3 4 Spatial disposition 1 Forced postures, unreachable function elements Physical stresses 2 Handling of loads, high operating forces, high cycle counts Material Physical influences 3 Air temperature, draught, air humidity, high or low pressure Biological influences 4 Fungal cultures, bacteria in inhaled air, contaminated germ-infested air filter Chemical influences 5 Corrosive, poisonous, harmful, irritant substances Thermal influences 6 High and low ambient and contact temperatures, fire Explosions 7 Chemical explosions (solid substances, vapours, gases), physical explosions Mechanical influences 8 Places where you can fall, danger sources, danger zones, collisions, impact points Energy Noise, vibration 9 Sound emissions, hand vibration, whole body vibration Electrical influences 10 Electrostatic charges, body through-flow, arcing Electromagnetic fields 11 Electromagnetic fields, magnetic fields Radiation 12 Electromagnetic waves, IR/UV radiation, laser, ionising radiation Presentation of information 13 Inadequate layout of notices, control elements; incompatibility Information Light conditions Psychomental stress Luminosity, glare, luminous colour, luminance distribution Unclear operating and work instructions, software ergonomics Organisational failings 16 Poorly thought-out, uncoordinated sequence of operations Hectic pace, stress, shock 17 Incorrect operation, panic reactions, mistakes Dangers when dealing with machinery. 7-7

226 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Mechanical dangers The essential distinguishing feature concerns the type of mechanical energy (kinetic, potential) and the question as to the basis of the energy (object or human) and which movements would precede a possible accident (kinematically based or free movements). Hazards: Hazards occur when potential dangers and humans coincide in time and space. There are two types: stochastic (random) and deterministic (predetermined) hazards. Deterministic hazards: These are rooted in in the functional design of the machine, e.g. danger points which are a technical necessity, such as those on tools with set movements. Such hazards are latent throughout the whole of the machine s lifetime and have a consistently high level of probability. An accident at a danger point is therefore only a matter of time, unless design measures are used to counteract it. Deterministic, mechanical danger points are still the main focus for all machine accidents, because their destructive impact is underestimated, both by design engineers and by those affected. Unlike stochastic dangers, with practice, danger points are visible to the naked eye of anyone with any sort of technical interest, whether in drawings, CAD designs or on finished machinery. It is really a benefit that today s design engineers can counteract these dangers using relatively simple means. Stochastic hazards occur with a time-based probability during a machine s lifetime. They are normally visualised with the bathtub curve, although strictly speaking this only applies to a few modules or components; but when it does apply, the effect is sudden and surprising. It is rare for these hazards and their causes to be directly identifiable and, as is unfortunately almost always the case with spectacular accidents, they can hardly ever be reliably predicted. Dangers Deterministic Stochastic Dangers Dangers Operating time Operating time Personal injury Material damage/personal injury Deterministic and stochastic dangers. 7-8

227 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Risk assessment Today there are more than 80 risk assessment procedures on the market and in academia, and the trend is rising. However, none of them is (legally) binding. Although the Machinery Directive and harmonised machinery safety standards refer to some standards (EN ISO , EN ISO , IEC 61508/EN ), there may still be considerable difficulties implementing them in practice. And it s not all the fault of design engineers: With no relevant training, they are supposed to derive binding measures from multiple statements of probability for more events than are likely to occur. The following definition of technical risk is currently generally accepted: Risk is not a law of nature, but a statement of probability (prognosis) regarding the impact of hazards on man and/or the environment under a defined set of circumstances. Risks are calculated from the frequency and severity of potential injury, damage to health or material damage, combined with the possibility or otherwise of technical, organisational or personal measures to avert or protect against the hazard. The result of the risk assessment ultimately determines the reliability requirements of the safety functions to be fulfilled by the safety-related parts of the control system. This also refers to the reliable performance of the guard function Definition and implementation of safety measures Many people like to use the term safe ; after all, the feeling of safety is one of the most important basic human needs. Advertising and insurance industries, along with politicians, really understand how to address this basic need and exploit it for their own interests. In technology, safe is often taken to mean the fulfilment of a machine function over a fixed period. That really addresses reliability, however, so we need to be precise: In its true sense, safety is understood to be the absence of potential and real danger for man and the environment. Safety and reliability have many common features: Both describe a future machine behaviour and are therefore statements of probability. The first commandment for safety-related design: All hazard types must be tackled within the design! The necessary design measures must counteract unforeseeable hazards, both stochastic and deterministic. The different modes of operation of both hazard types also require different design methods. When selecting the design methods, the following should be noted: 1. Design measures should always be used to reduce existing risks to such an extent that the achieved residual risk is tolerable to the individual and society (i.e. it may occur and must then be accepted). 2. As stochastic and deterministic hazards vary substantially, it is only logical that the measures taken to counteract them must also differ. Machine manufacturers are obliged only to supply safe products on the internal European market. For this reason, they must calculate all the hazards associated with the machine in advance and assess the resulting risks. With the knowledge gained from the hazard analysis and the risk assessment, manufacturers must design their machines in such a way that cannot be harmful either to users, other persons or the environment. In other words: the machines must be safe. 7-9

228 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Type of energy Energy bearer Movement Graphic Hazard due to No. 4 5 Potential energy 1 Movement along fixed channels Danger points on controlled moving parts: Danger is confined to a specific location. 2 Kinetic energy Objects 3 Danger sources due to uncontrolled moving parts: Danger emanates from a specific location. 4 Potential energy Free movement Places where you can fall 5 People, parts of the body 6 Impact points Kinetic energy 7 Movement along fixed channels Inertia forces 8 Basic mechanical hazards. 7-10

229 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Dangers Deterministic Stochastic Dangers Dangers Operating time Operating time Design measures Objective: Eliminate faults that lead to danger Objective: Manage faults that lead to danger Deterministic methods: Stochastic methods: Avoid dangers Safe life principle Secure against dangers Failsafe principle Warn of dangers Redundancy principle Important design measures for avoiding danger. 7-11

230 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Design measures against stochastic hazards Stochastic hazards can be mainly attributed to component failures or software errors. Although they affect machine reliability, they may not necessarily have an adverse effect on human safety. The aim of targeted design measures is to increase the time-based probability that machines will fulfil their intended function within an agreed operating time and remain immune to random component failures. That way they can harm neither man nor the environment. The most well known design measures are: Safe life principle Failsafe principle Redundancy principle Measures relating to the safe life principle start from the assumption that the machine is adequately dimensioned and designed according to its function, and as such will operate as intended during its warranted lifetime: without faults, failures or danger. This design principle is particularly significant on safety devices such as rupture discs, for example. The model shown below used the extremely reliable buckling bar principle. Application of this principle assumes that: 1. All the stresses that act on the machine are known 2. The applied calculation methods and accepted material performance match reality 3. No influences other than those considered in the calculation will occur during the machine s lifetime Idea Development Product Pressurising medium Item A Pressurising medium 1 Key: 1 Rupture disc 2 Buckling pin 3 Sealing membrane 4 Joint 4 2 A 2 Non-fragmenting rupture disc (reverse buckling disc). 7-12

231 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design In real life, none of these assumptions can be guaranteed. For this reason, it is advisable to take a different route. The failsafe principle knowingly permits errors. However, the systems are designed and constructed so that a safety-related crash does not lead into the abyss but stops at an agreed level. The systems react to faults in such a way that they fail to safety - although this only applies to known, identifiable and foreseeable faults. This assumes that energy for this function may be supplied within the system not just in case of emergency, but that sufficient energy is always stored in advance. This will be dissipated in the case of danger and the system transferred to a low-energy and therefore stable condition. Implementation of this principle often makes use of ever-present effects such as gravitational or frictional forces and the self-locking that can be achieved through these means. In redundant systems, more components are provided to fulfil a function than are actually necessary. The assumption is as follows: If one of these components should malfunction or fail, the other will completely take over its function. The principle is to achieve the greatest possible reliability with a minimum of redundancy. As reasonable as this principle may be, it does have one important weakness: Experience shows that there are always situations, and always will be situations, in which all redundant components fail simultaneously due to a common cause failure. These situations are very difficult to predict and control through the design. Consistent but expensive diversity, particularly in terms of physical diversity, produces the best results. Unfavourable Favourable Check valve Crush point Check valve When the hose assembly fails, the medium leaks before the check valve. Tool drops in an uncontrolled manner. When the hose assembly fails, the controlled check valve prevents the liquid column from breaking. Tool remains above. Hose assembly with check valves. 7-13

232 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Redundancy Example Explanation 1 No. 2 3 Homogeneous 1 Safety valve Safety valve Duplication only increases safety when no systematic errors can occur, e.g. corrosion, material mix-up, which can render both safety devices ineffective simultaneously. Safety valve Rupture disc Diversity in the action principle of the safety device: Diverse (components) 2 Switching the action principle makes it unlikely that the independent safety devices, which operate to different principles and are made by different manufacturers, would fail simultaneously. Actuator Actuator Diversity in the physical principle: Diverse (process variables) 3 Each of the diverse, controlled valves is activated by the control systems CS1/CS2, which react if a limit value on two process variables connected by a physical law (e.g. general equation of state) are exceeded. Pressure sensor Temperature sensor Homogenous and diverse redundancy. 7-14

233 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Design measures against deterministic hazards Deterministic hazards can be attributed to the functional design of the machinery, as required by technical necessity, and the employed procedures. Targeted design measures are intended to stop the possibility of latent dangers impacting on people. Three methods have been developed in the course of technical progress: In contrast to the measures taken against stochastic hazards, which are fundamentally regarded as being of equal value, the EC Machinery Directive specifies the sequence and priority in which the respective measures against deterministic hazards should be applied: 1. Indirect 2. Direct 3. Informative 1. Indirect safety technology 2. Direct safety technology 3. Informative safety technology Safety technology methods Safety technology Indirect Direct Informative Action principle Avoid dangers Secure against dangers Warn against dangers Diagram Machining Observe Act STOP! EC Machinery Directive, EN ISO Eliminate or minimise dangers Take the necessary protective measures when dangers cannot be eliminated Instruct the user about the residual risks Safety technology methods. 7-15

234 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design 1 Unfavourable Favourable x 2 Shearing hazard avoided by design Indirect safety technology Methods using indirect safety technology attempt to configure components, machines and processes in such a way that they present no risk, or only a low, accepted risk to people. Geometric and energetic measures are available: Geometric measures attempt to avoid the hazardous effect of danger points on moving machine parts by complying with standardised minimum distances to ensure that dangerous bottlenecks do not even arise, or by making such bottlenecks inaccessible by complying with safety distances. Energetic measures attempt to stop the hazard s underlying energy having a harmful effect on people, by: Limiting the effective energy Interrupting the flow of energy to people Targeted deformation of machine parts rather than the human body The first measure attempts to limit the energies and forces that occur at a danger point, so that their impact remains below acceptable physiological values. Technically, however, such an energy level is generally only of limited use. The second measure prevents harmful impact on people by interrupting the flow of energy or forces towards the human body before the pain threshold is reached. The third measure reduces the rigidity of machine parts to such an extent that, if a danger point is accessed, machine rather than body parts are deformed. Caution is required, however: Indirect safety technology is often portrayed as a silver bullet, but it cannot be applied on danger points with technological functions. Safeguards against these dangers should be provided via special measures such as protective devices, for example. 7-16

235 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Elastic closing edge on protective devices Direct safety technology Components used in direct safety technology safeguard against dangers that are necessary to the machine function and therefore cannot be avoided. Protective devices are arranged between operator and danger, preventing the two coinciding in time and space. Guards or protective devices are used. Guards, e.g. enclosures or covers, form impenetrable physical barriers and as such protect against entry or access to hazardous situations. They can also prevent operators being hit by objects ejected from the protected areas. Although protective devices such as two-hand circuits or light beam devices do not prevent entry or access to hazardous situations, they do render them ineffective by influencing the process via the machine control system as soon as they are activated. Ergonomic aspects decide on the manageability and therefore the acceptance of the protective devices. The most important ergonomic requirement is that the demands placed on operators during day-to-day handling of the protective device must be no more than necessary. 7-17

236 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Protection against Breaking the cause and effect relationship Effect via Diagram Description Examples Explanation No. Danger sources z Space y x Static physical barriers Trapping Fixed guard Trap covers, protection structures on earth moving machinery (ROPS, FOPS) Covers, enclosures, guards Safeguards hold back the uncontrolled moving parts, absorb their kinetic energy and stop them reaching people. When in position, safeguards provide a physical barrier between the danger points and the work/ traffic area. People are unable to reach danger points. z y x Mobile physical barriers 3 Impeding device Finger impeder, hand impeder Safeguards are kinematically connected to hazardous movements. They positively keep people away from danger zones. Danger points Space and time Mobile physical barriers 4 Interlocked or locked movable guard Covers, enclosures monitored by position switches Opening the safeguard interrupts the hazardous movement and lifts the physical barrier between the danger point and person. Its safety depends on the reliable function of the safetyrelated parts of the control system. Time Reliable control measures 5 Safeguard that binds you to a location Enabling switch, hold-to-run control device, two-hand circuits During the hazardous movement, safeguards bind people to a safe location, from which they cannot reach the danger points. If a person should leave the safe location, the hazardous movement is stopped. 6 Safeguard with presence sensing Optoelectronic capacitive sensors, safe edges, pressuresensitive mats, light grids, scanners Safeguards prevent hazards by interrupting hazardous movements as soon as anyone exceeds the safe limits and approaches the danger point. Basic types of protective device. 7-18

237 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Informative safety technology As the final option in combating deterministic hazards, informative safety technology attempts to ensure that at-risk personnel observe safe work practices through targeted messages and information, using methods such as: Safety signs, safety guidelines in operating manuals, internal company instruction organised by the machine user etc. The effectiveness of this method varies from country to country. It can certainly enjoy considerable success in other cultures, but it should not necessarily be relied upon in European countries. Due to different mentalities among the population, priority must be given to technical protective measures that are activated automatically and prevent or safeguard against dangers. It would be practically impossible to build a machine with an acceptable level of risk using only one of the design measures listed here. The various methods used in these measures must instead be co-ordinated to ensure they complement each other and are effective both functionally and overall. 1) 1) Source: Neudörfer A.: Konstruieren sicherheitsgerichteter Produkte [Design of safety-related products], 4 th edition, Heidelberg, Berlin, New York et al, Springer,

238 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.2 Mechanical design Channel Information parameters Process Means Example No. 4 Text Operating instructions 1 2 Welding harmful to eyes Static Graphic symbol Stop, halting a movement 3 Rapid stop ISO 7000 Safety mark Visual 4 Marking 5 Colour combination: Yellow-black (permanent danger) Red-white (temporary danger) Light signals 6 Active diagrams Main motor Infeed table open Cover open No compressed air Film broken Magazine empty Dynamic Process visualisation, simulation 8 Aural Acoustic signals 9 Tactile Moving objects Evasive safeguard 10 D Means of informative safety technology 7-20

239 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Introduction Pneumatics ranks among the drive technologies in engineering, alongside electrics and hydraulics. To ensure that a machine can be operated safely, it is not enough to identify hazards and then pass this information to a control system or safety components. The drives must also be brought to a safe condition; only then is the machine safe Well-tried principles and protective measures Safe pneumatics can be divided into two basic fields: Firstly, the basic and well-tried principles, as described in Annex B of DIN EN ISO , and secondly, the protective measures relevant for pneumatic drives. These include control technology solutions that move a cylinder in accordance with a desired behaviour Basic and well-tried principles First let s look at some basic and well-tried principles of pneumatics. These include good compressed air treatment: Compressed air must be filtered and must be free of water and compressor oil. Poorly treated compressed air will cause elements to malfunction. Valves no longer switch and become stuck; cylinders may move unintentionally due to leakages. And there s the recurring question on whether or not to lubricate compressed air. The maxim here is: Lubricate once, lubricate forever. However, today s pneumatic components have lifetime lubrication and no longer need to be lubricated. If new components are built into old machines on which the compressed air is lubricated, the new parts will also be lubricated. In this case, select a lubricant that is valve-compatible. Only use a small amount of lubricant, for overlubrication will also lead to malfunctions Selection and dimension The pneumatic components should be selected and dimensioned to withstand the expected demands. Environmental conditions such as temperature, oils, acids, alkaline solutions and cleaning agents should be noted. A good safety-related circuit is worthless if aggressive cleaning agents soften the pneumatic hose. Pneumatic cylinders are normally calculated to apply the necessary force required within the machine. However, the calculation should also take account of kinetic energy. If a cylinder moves too quickly applications frequently require high cycle counts the energy with which a pneumatic cylinder travels to the end position will be correspondingly high. This will damage the cylinder in the long term. 7-21

240 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Pressure limitation Another basic principle is pressure limitation. A pressure relief valve is located on the air chamber behind the compressor and protects the air chamber from explosion. The machine has an integrated service unit, which regulates the operating pressure. If the setting for the operating pressure is turned up, the forces within the plant will increase, which can lead to an overload. Consequently, the machine operator should not be able to change the operating pressure without authorisation. It makes sense, therefore, to have a pressure relief valve in the service unit, protecting the machine from a dangerous failure of the pressure regulator. If there were any defect, the machine would face the full mains pressure. For this reason, further pressure limitation measures are required, which will concern the dimensioning of the cylinder. Where pneumatic cylinders are installed vertically, excess pressure arises on the cylinder due to the moving mass, the operating pressure and the surface difference. If this cylinder is then to be stopped pneumatically, e.g. by closing off the compressed air, pressure peaks of well over 30 bar are possible. In turn, this pressure will overload all the pneumatic components used in this part of the circuit. DNC PPV-A with 80 kg external load 0 mm 500 mm 60 % 20 % Circuit diagram, pressure values (source: Festo) Component description Identifier State variable Cylinder, double-action DNC PPV-A Travel mm Pressure gauge Pressure up Pressure bar Pressure gauge Pressure down Pressure bar Pressure values (source: Festo) 7-22

241 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Positioning of safeguards Application in conjunction with a light beam device or two-hand circuit provides another reason for ensuring that the design of a pneumatic circuit is thorough and correct. In accordance with DIN EN ISO Positioning of safeguards with respect to the approach speeds of parts of the human body, the stopping performance of a hazardous drive must be measured and the measurement used to determine the distance of the light beam device or two-hand circuit. The speed of a pneumatic cylinder depends not only on the operating pressure, mass and mounting position, but above all on the screw joints, hoses and valves that are used, along with their flow rates. If the latter is not calculated, the assembler will determine the machine s cycle counts and thereby the stopping performance for a light beam device, based on a greater or lesser degree of knowledge. If an operator then changes the hoses and screw joints, enabling a higher flow rate, he will be changing the stopping performance at the same time. The distance of the light beam device may no longer be sufficient for this drive; the risk of a hazardous incident would increase significantly. It is advisable, therefore, to make all the drive calculations in full and to include the values for hoses and screw joints in the circuit diagram. An indication that the information is safety-related also makes sense. A photograph during the acceptance test, showing exactly this layout, would also be a helpful guide in the event of any legal dispute Basic principle of mechanical springs or air springs The mechanically well-tried spring is another basic principle of safety technology, in mechanics as well as pneumatics and hydraulics. On valves with a mechanical spring, the valve s switching position is clearly defined if the control signal or even the compressed air supply is switched off. This is not the case on pulse valves (bistable valves with 2 coils). For this reason, monostable valves are preferred to pulse valves in safety technology. When selecting monostable valves it is worth paying particular attention to the return mode, for not only are there mechanical spring return valves but also air spring return valves. The diagram below shows two monostable valves. The upper valve has a mechanical spring, the lower valve has an air spring. The return mode is shown on the right-hand side of the valve. These are 5/2 directional valves with pilot control, manual override and electrical activation Monostable valves with mechanical/air spring (source: Festo). 7-23

242 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design However, air-spring valves can only be reset if sufficient pressure is available for the air spring. The compressed air supply to the air springs can come from pressure port 1 or from a separate control air connection. Ultimately, this depends on the valve series. Specialists must clarify whether air-spring valves can be used in safety-related circuits, and under what conditions. Very close attention must therefore be paid to the design of the valve in pneumatic circuit diagrams. Further safety principles in pneumatics concern the reduction of force and speed. These are mainly applied in set-up mode. Force is reduced by lowering the operating pressure for the cylinder. In pneumatics, speed is generated via the intensity of the flow rate. In both cases, the supply of pressure to the operating valve is simply switched. The risk assessment will determine whether this switchover needs to be single or dual channel Control air Working pressure 1 Working pressure 2 Control air Reduced force (source: Festo) Reduced speed (source: Festo) 7-24

243 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Circuit-based solutions Having looked at some examples for basic and well-tried principles in pneumatics, let s look now at the actual protective measures. Protective measures for safety-related pneumatics describe circuitbased solutions. These include: Protection against unexpected start-up Ventilation and venting Braking movement Blocking movement Reversing movement Free movement option Balancing forces on the drive Protection against unexpected start-up In the first instance, a manual start-up valve on the service unit provides effective protection against unexpected start-up. With this manual valve, the maintenance engineer can vent the machine, using a padlock to protect against a restart. The next sensible measure is an electrical start-up valve, which can be activated via a higher level control system. This measure also includes a pressure sensor, which monitors the operating pressure. The control system detects any drop in pressure and consequently switches off all the outputs plus the soft start valve. As soon as the corresponding operating pressure has returned, the control system switches the compressed air back on and ventilates the machine and its drives. The proper selection of operating valves is another effective protective measure. Valves with a separate control air supply cannot be switched without control air. As a result, valves would be prevented from switching in the event of an electrical fault. What s more, if the installed operating valves are closed in their rest position, there will be no cylinder movement when the machine is ventilated, as the compressed air is still unable to reach the cylinder. If the installed operating valves allow air to reach the cylinder when the compressed air is switched on, a slow build-up of pressure is generally desirable. A soft start valve can be used in this case. This valve will initially ventilate the machine slowly via a throttle point. The valve will not open fully until an operating pressure of 3 bar is present, for example. Only at this point will the entire operating pressure be available at full flow rate. So this valve can be used to perform slow, controlled cylinder movements in the initial ventilation phase. Should a hose be installed incorrectly, there would immediately be an audible hissing sound, but the hose would not thrash about forcefully, as it would if full pressure were applied. 7-25

244 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Venting Venting is frequently used as a protective measure. It can be used when the cylinder presents no danger in a de-pressurised state. However, the respective mounting position and the mass at the cylinders must be taken into account. The concept of this measure is similar to that of removing power in the electrical field: The electrical voltage is simply switched off to avoid hazards from contact with electrical cables. The principle is exactly the same in the pneumatic field, for without power/compressed air, there s no danger. However, in safety technology it is always necessary to examine the mechanics which will ultimately have to perform the movements. If a vertically-installed cylinder is vented, the cylinder piston will obey inertia and move downwards. Additional protective measures must be considered for this exact scenario. In industry, however, the practice of ventilating and venting is coming under increasingly critical scrutiny for quite different reasons: The procedure costs a lot of time and therefore money; productivity falls. The fact that safety is the first priority is undisputed. A machine can certainly be ventilated and vented at performance level PL = e. The soft start and exhaust valve MS6-SV is a safety component in accordance with the MD 2006/42 EC and meets performance level e. It is an intrinsically safe, redundant, mechatronic system in accordance with the requirements of DIN EN ISO The pneumatic safety-related objective, i.e. safe venting, is guaranteed even if there is a fault in the valve (e.g. due to wear, contamination). 24V MS6-SV A1 A2 A12 S22 S34 Y4 Y5 Y32 S21 S Netzteil/ Power unit/ Alimentation Eingangsschaltung/ Input circuit/ Circuit d entrée Taktausgänge/ Test pulse outputs/ Sorties impulsionelles & & & μcontroller 1 μcontroller 2 0V GND Schematic, safe ventilation and venting (source: Festo). 7-26

245 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design The schematic on page 7-26 shows a circuit with a dual-channel design for safe ventilation and venting. Two enable signals are sent from the electronic safety relay to pins 1 and 2 on the MS6-SV. An additional electronic safety relay would draw attention to any shorts between the two devices. As a result, performance level e can be achieved. The circuit diagram does not show the potential feedback from MS6-SV to the PNOZ. A volt-free contact, which is incorporated into the feedback loop, is available for this purpose. This enables the PNOZ to detect whether the MS6-SV is ready for operation. Single-channel ventilation and venting is also possible, of course. Electropneumatic valves in the service unit fulfil this purpose, receiving their commands from the higher level control system or from a single-channel safety circuit. Venting can also be implemented via the operating valve 1 V Normal operation In normal operation, one of the two valve coils 1 M1 or 1 M2 is always under voltage. As a result the valve is switched. So the cylinder piston is either in one end position or moves from one end position to the other. The cylinder is vented when the operating valve is in its middle setting. This is the case when both coils are de-energised. The venting process on the operating valve is faster than venting via the service unit because the route for the compressed air is shorter and the pressure volume is lower. If venting is performed via the service unit, several cylinders will be vented and at the same time the pressure volume will be higher. There is another advantage to venting via the operating valve: Additional protective measures can easily be implemented in parallel on other cylinders, such as reversing for example. Festo MS6-SV (source: Festo) 1 A1 1 V2 1 V3 1 V M M2 0 Z1 1 3 Venting with 5/2 directional valve (source: Festo). 7-27

246 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Reversing Reversing as a protective measure is the right choice when the movement of the cylinder piston is dangerous in only one direction. The monostable 5/2 directional valve, as shown in the diagram with 1 V1, needs an electrical control signal at the coil 1 M1 in order to switch the valve. The cylinder s piston rod extends in sequence. If the coil is switched off, the control force on the left side of the valve will be missing. The mechanical spring on the right side can switch the valve back on; the piston rod continues to retract. In the normal machine cycle, the control system switches the valve coil on and off. A safety relay connected between the control system and the valve coil can also switch off the coil. In this case, it would be irrelevant whether the output on the control system (a nonsafety-related PLC for example) is still switched on. Even if the electrical supply voltage should fail, the valve would be switched back to its home position. The piston rod cannot reverse until compressed air is returned. The emergency stop function therefore needs a stop category 1 for reversing. The compressed air will not be switched off until the cylinder has reached its safe end position. A stop category 0 switches off the compressed air supply immediately and cannot be used in this case because reversing would no longer be possible. All pneumatic circuit diagrams must allow for a total failure of the compressed air supply. The electronic control system detects the failure of the compressed air: To ensure that the piston rod has sufficient air available to guarantee that the piston rod can reverse, a stored volume is arranged upstream of the operating valve. A check valve is connected upstream of the stored volume, to ensure that the stored air cannot discharge in the direction of the compressed air supply. As a result, the compressed air always flows in the direction of the cylinder Failure mode 1 A1 1 V2 1 V M1 1 V1 1 When considering the failure mode of the operating valve, the following possibilities are conceivable: The valve does not switch, so the piston rod does not move either. There is no danger. There may be various causes. It may be that voltage is not reaching the valve coil, the valve may be defective. Sometimes the armature in the coil or the piston in the valve may stick. A different type of error occurs if the valve does not switch back. In this case, the piston rod continues to extend or remains extended. On the electrical side, a short may be the reason, or possibly the valve piston is hanging up. In any case, this is a dangerous failure. Single-channel reversing (source: Festo) 7-28

247 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design Another error source lies exclusively within the valve: The valve piston remains stuck in an intermediate position. To be able to describe this fault more specifically, you need to be familiar with the internal design of the valve. The question is, when the valve piston is in the intermediate position, are all the valve s connections blocked off or interlinked? If all the connections are blocked off, compressed air can no longer flow through the valve. If the cylinder piston is extended, compressed air would no longer flow in, but neither would any air flow out of the cylinder. This would represent a dangerous failure of the valve. If all the valve s connections are interlinked, the cylinder would possibly not be completely de-pressurised, but its force would be substantially reduced. Ultimately, the cylinder s mounting position and the mass to be moved would need to be considered in order to estimate the danger. It is clear that single-channel systems will fail in the event of a dangerous failure of one component in the safety chain. As a result, they can only be used when the risk is low. For greater risks, dualchannel systems should always be selected. On a dual-channel system, both operating valves 1 V1 and 1 V2 must be switched to enable the piston rod to extend. If one valve fails to switch, the piston rod will not extend. If both valves have switched and one valve switches off, because the cable to the coil is broken for example, the piston rod will retract, even if the other valve is still switched. If one of the two valves becomes stuck in the switched position but the other valve can still be switched, the piston rod will either extend or retract, depending on how the functioning valve is connected. This is called single fault tolerance, as a dangerous failure does not lead to the loss of the safety function. 1 A1 1 V3 1 V4 1 V V M M Dual-channel reversing (source: Festo) 7-29

248 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design How do you detect a dangerous failure on a valve? Valves with integrated switching position sensing offer one possibility. These valves have an integrated sensor in the body of the valve, which senses the switching position of the valve piston. A diagnostic coverage of 99 % can be applied when calculating the performance level for this valve. Pressure sensors on either of the two valve outputs are another possibility. When a signal changes at the valve coil, the signal at the sensor must change within a very short time, in which case the valve, sensor and wiring are all in order. This applies for the pressure sensor as well as the sensor integrated within the valve. A third possibility is provided by valve diagnostics, which make use of the sensors that are normally installed on the cylinder to sense the cylinder s switching position. This demands some skill from the programmer, however. The cylinder s piston rod is in the rear end position; the sensor registers this position. Initially, only one operating valve is switched, so the piston rod is not yet permitted to leave the end position. The piston rod may only leave the end position once the second valve is switched. If the piston rod were to extend even as the first valve was switched, this would indicate that the second valve was already switched. A fault would therefore be present. The other operating valve must not be switched until the next cycle; this is the only way to detect a dangerous failure of the second valve. It is important to check all sensors for a signal change, for only a signal change confirms that the sensor and wiring are operating correctly. The example below illustrates the interaction between pneumatics and electrical engineering. A standard PLC controls the normal machine cycle. As the cylinder is categorised as a dangerous drive, a risk analysis resulted in a dual-channel design for controlling the cylinder. If a dual-channel safety switch acts upon a dual-channel safety relay, the safety relay will switch off the coils on both valves 1 V1 and 1 V2 if the safety switch is operated. The PLC needs a signal so that it can also 1 A1 1 V3 1 V4 1 V V M M Standard PLC Safety relay 1 M1 1 M2 Interaction between electrical engineering and pneumatics (source: Festo). 7-30

249 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design switch off the outputs to the coils. The safety function impacts upon the PLC, therefore. A performance level of d to e can be achieved, depending on the diagnostics. The valves will require a diagnostic coverage of 99 % for PL = e Stopping and braking Another protective measure is to stop or brake a movement. The intended use and application must be clarified quite specifically in advance. The clamping cartridge is a holding brake; its sole purpose is to clamp the piston rod once it has already stopped. A service brake can absorb kinetic energy, so a moving piston rod can be decelerated using a service brake. Clamping cartridge A clamping cartridge is used when a vertically installed cylinder is to be held at an end position in order to stop any further downward movement of the piston rod in the event of a compressed air failure. It is important that the clamping cartridge does not close until the piston rod is at the end position and has come to a stop. If a cylinder with a service brake is used instead of a clamping cartridge, the movement can be stopped at any time. But what happens if the piston rod is in an intermediate position between the two end positions as the brake is opened? If the cylinder is installed vertically and is de-pressurised, the piston rod will move downwards with its mass. This generally means danger. Admittedly, this danger would no longer exist with a horizontal installation. If the cylinder still contained compressed air and the piston rod happened to be in an intermediate position, a hazardous movement would still occur as the brake was opened. One side of the cylinder is ventilated, the other side is vented. Pre-vented systems generate very high acceleration values and speeds. 3/2 directional valves provide an elegant solution in this case. Cylinder with clamping cartridge (source: Festo) 1A1 12 OV V1 4 2 OM1 E-STOP circuit 1 M Cylinder with clamping cartridge and monostable 5/2 directional valve (source: Festo). 7-31

250 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design 4 switch variants are possible with two 3/2 directional valves: The cylinder is de-pressurised on both sides when both valves are switched off (as shown in the circuit diagram). If both valves are switched, the cylinder is ventilated on both sides. Forces need to be balanced on the valve piston to ensure that the piston rod remains stationary as the brake is opened. This requires different operating pressures on the two 3/2 directional valves. The values that are required here depend on the mounting position and the mass at the piston rod. Once the brake is open, one of the two valves 1 V1 or 1 V2 switches off; the piston rod moves slowly in the required direction. Two throttle check valves 1 V3 and 1 V4 are responsible for the slow movement. These valves are incorporated as exhaust throttles in order to restrict the compressed air flowing from the cylinder. Exhaust throttles are only effective if there is air in the cylinder, which is another reason why it should be ventilated before the brake is opened. In this context, we are reminded once again of the correct design of the pneumatic drives, as described previously under the basic and well-tried principles. For the design is especially significant for the brake. It is commonly believed that a compressed air signal achieves a higher speed in a thin hose than it does in a thick hose. The lower volume is generally given as the reason. However, the flow behaviour within the hose has a much greater significance, as the following graphic shows. Cylinder with brake (source: Festo) 1A V3 1V V V V2 2 0M 1 1 M 1 1 M 2 E-STOP circuit Auxiliary control air e.g. 400 kpa Operating pressure 600 kpa Operating pressure Cylinder with brake (source: Festo) 7-32

251 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design 300 ms Hose diameter 2.5 mm mm mm mm mm 80 is faster! m 12 Hose length Ventilation time based on hose length and diameter at 6 bar (600 kpa) (source: Festo). The ventilation time rises as the length of the hose increases; the increase is more pronounced on thin hoses than on thick ones. The behaviour when venting is the same, so the brake s reaction time depends on the hose. With a long, thin hose, the brake activates later than with a short, thick hose. For this reason, it is always beneficial to locate the shift valve directly on the brake. The brake closes when the pressure drops below approx. 3.5 bar. So when the compressed air drops below the set operating pressure, the brake reacts more quickly. However, care needs to be taken if the machine operator can adjust the operating pressure on the machine himself. If the operating pressure is increased, the venting time will also be extended. The brake will react later, the stopping performance will be longer. Brakes and clamping cartridges are zero fault tolerant, in other words, they can fail. Just like on a car, a brake is subject to constant wear. For this reason, it must be tested at appropriate intervals. For further details on the design and testing of the brake please refer to the operating manual or consult the manufacturer Circuit diagram and operating manual To conclude, some thoughts on pneumatic circuit diagrams: Annex 7 of the Machinery Directive calls for instructions. These instructions should provide all persons working on the machine with all the information necessary to perform their work safely. For maintenance engineers this means access to complete, accurate circuit diagrams that match the machine. They must be able to locate the components they see on the circuit diagram on the machine, otherwise it is impossible to work safely. Connection designations should be included in the circuit diagram; the hose connections should be made accordingly. Components should be identified and the connections named. These markings should be identifiable over the whole of the machine s service life. It makes sense for 7-33

252 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.3 Pneumatic design safety-related components to be identified on the circuit diagrams. As such, the maintenance engineer will recognise the special significance of these components. The correct connection designations should be stated alongside the component designations. If hoses are connected incorrectly because the connection designations are incorrect, the piston rod will suddenly extend rather than retract when the valve is activated electrically. Under what conditions is a circuit diagram drawn and viewed? All drives and valves are shown in their home position; compressed air is present, even if the start-up valve on the service unit is shown in the off position. The home position is the position of the drives before automatic mode is started and is different from the machine s initial position. In the initial position the drives are de-pressurised. On a vertically installed cylinder the piston rod is extended, while on this cylinder the piston rod is retracted in the home position. Before starting automatic mode, the control engineer must first bring the drives from the initial position to the home position. With the exception of mechanical directly actuated limit switches, all valves are shown in the nonactuated condition. On monostable valves and middle-setting valves, this switch setting is defined by the mechanical spring. The circuit diagram display starts at the bottom left with the service unit or pressure source and continues towards the top right. However, when drafting or planning the circuit diagram, you should start at the top with the drives and only draw the service unit at the end. Before the design engineer starts to think about the control valves for the cylinders, he needs to be clear about the mounting position, the behaviour in the event of a power failure and subsequent restoration (pneumatics and electrics), the necessary protective measures, plus the control and stop category. The frequently fixed allocation of 5/2 directional valves to double-acting cylinders generally leads to a vain attempt to provide individual cylinders with reasonable, effective and above all low-priced safety circuits. Only when all the requirements of the cylinder have been defined can thoughts turn to the service unit. The cylinders may require different operating pressures, in which case several pressure regulators will need to be used. In the event of an emergency stop, only one part of the compressed air should switch off, while in another part of the machine, full pressure should still be available. Valve terminals require a separate control air supply, for which the service unit must offer an appropriate solution. Once these aspects have been considered, a service unit can often look quite different to the one that was originally planned. This is a disadvantage if the service unit has already been ordered at an early stage: The additional parts that are needed will have to be selected, ordered and installed and the necessary modifications will be complex, costing even more time and money. Information regarding hose colours and hose cross sections, screw joints and hose numbers help to provide clarity during assembly and when troubleshooting. Clarity is always a plus for safety and speed; DIN ISO 1219, DIN ISO 5599 and DIN EN are standards dealing with the generation of circuit diagrams and graphic symbols. In pneumatics, is safety technology more difficult than the electrical technology? Essentially no. The basic principles and concepts are the same or similar. Compressed air as a medium is different; to many people it s new and unfamiliar. As with electrical drives, mechanics must also be considered in pneumatics. An electric motor does not operate through its shaft alone; extensive mechanics generally follow to a greater or lesser extent, as is the case with pneumatics. The information in this chapter, with its examples, ideas and suggestions, is simply an initial introduction to the subject of safety and pneumatic design and is certainly not sufficient to guarantee safe operation of a plant or machine. 7-34

253 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Basic physical knowledge In hydraulics the talk is of hydrodynamic energy transfer, e.g. a pump transfers mechanical energy to the oil and flow energy is used to drive a turbine wheel, for example Advantages of hydrostatic energy transfer The following advantages play a role in hydrostatic energy transfer: Transfer of high forces and powers in the smallest possible space Sensitive, infinitely variable control of speeds Smooth speed control under load, within a large setting range Large transmission range on drives Quiet operation, fast, smooth reversal of motion Simple, safe overload protection High switch-off accuracy when stopping the operating component. Long service life and low plant maintenance as the sliding components are automatically lubricated by the hydraulic fluid Disadvantages of hydrostatic energy transfer Definitions Fluid power: The means whereby signals and energy can be transmitted, controlled and distributed using a pressurised fluid or gas as the medium System: Arrangement of interconnected components that transmits and controls fluid power energy Component: An individual unit (e.g. cylinder) comprising one or more parts designed to be a functional part of a fluid power system Hydraulics: Science and technology which deals with the use of a liquid as the pressure medium Maximum working pressure: The highest pressure at which a system is intended to operate in steady-state conditions Rated pressure: The highest pressure at which the component is intended to operate for a number of repetitions sufficient to assure adequate service life Control device: A device that provides an input signal to an operating device (switch) Operating device: Device that provides an output signal to a component (solenoid) Piping: Any combination of fittings, couplings or connectors with pipes, hoses or tubes, which allows fluid flow between components The following disadvantages should be mentioned: Operation accuracy changes in the event of oil viscosity fluctuations due to temperature variation Sealing problems, particularly when there are high system pressures and temperatures Air dissolves in hydraulic fluid. Air bubbles are created when the pressure drops, adversely affecting control accuracy Hydraulic fluids are channelled in a loop with cooler and filter 7-35

254 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Relevant units Size Unit Symbol Relationship Lengths Micrometre μm 1 μm = mm Millimetre mm 1 mm = 0.1 cm = 0.01 dm = m Centimetre cm 1 cm = 10 mm = 10,000 μm Decimetre dm 1 dm = 10 cm = 10 mm = 100,000 μm Metre r 1 m = 10 dm = 100 cm = mm = 1,000,000 μm Kilometre km 1 km = m = 100,000 cm = 1,000,000 mm Areas Square centimetre cm² 1 cm² = 100 mm² Square decimetre dm² 1 dm² = 100 mm² = 10,000 mm² Square metre m² 1 mm² = 100 dm² = 10,000 cm² = 1,000,000 mm² Ar a 1 a = 100 m² Hectare ha 1 ha = 100 a = 10,000 m² Square kilometre km² 1 km² = 100 ha = 10,000 a = 1,000,000 m² Volume Cubic centimetre cm³ 1 cm³ = mm³ = 1 ml = l Cubic decimetre dm³ 1 dm³ = cm³ = 1,000,000 mm³ Cubic metre m³ 1 m³ = dm³ = 1,000,000 cm³ Millilitre ml 1 ml = l = 1 cm³ Litre l 1 l = 1000 ml = 1 dm³ Hectolitre hl 1 hl = 100 l = 100 dm³ Density Gram/ Cubic centimetre Force/ Weight force Newton 1 dan = 10 N Torque Newton metre Nm 1 Nm / 1 J Pressure Pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m² = 0.01 mbar = N Bar Bar Psi 1 psi = bar = 100,000 = bar Mass Milligram mg 1 mg = g Gram g 1 g = 1000 mg Kilogram kg 1 kg = g = 1,000,000 mg Tonne t 1 t = 1000 kg = 1,000,000 g Megagram Mg 1 Mg = 1 t 7-36

255 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Size Unit Symbol Relationship Acceleration Metre/square second 1 g = 9.81 m/s² Angular speed One/second ω = 2 π n n in 1/s Radian/second Power Watt W Newton metre/ Nm/s second Joule/second J/s Work/energy, Watt second Ws heat Newton metre Nm Joule J Kilowatt hour kwh Mechanical stress Kilojoule Megajoule Newton/ square millimetre kj MJ Plane angle Second 1 = 1 /60 Minute 1 = 60 Degree 1 kwh = Wh = Ws = Ws = kj = kj = 3.6 MJ Rotational speed Radian rad 1 rad = 1m/m = rad = 180 /π One/second 1/s One/minute 1/min 7-37

256 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design General hydraulic relationships Pressure, absolute pressure and overpressure Pressure p is the force applied to a unit area, also called pressure for short. The amount of pressure at any point is irrespective of the position. The unit of measurement for pressure is defined with PASCAL using the base units of the International System of Units: kilogram, metre and second Force and path transmission The principle of force and path transmission can be best explained using the example of an hydraulic press: In accordance with Pascal s law, the pressure generated by the force F1 is transmitted equally to all parts of the fluid and to the area A2. This gives: Absolute pressure: The absolute pressure scale starts at Pabs = 0, as absolute pressure is the zero pressure of a vacuum. S2 F1 Overpressure: The difference between absolute pressure and the existing atmospheric pressure Pamb is called overpressure. F2 S Pascal s law Pascal s law is the basic law of hydrostatics and applies to incompressible fluids at rest: Pressure exerted anywhere in a confined fluid is transmitted equally to the internal wall of the container and to the fluid Gravitational pressure F2 = F1 A2 A1 In this way, it is possible to illustrate the principle of force transmission: For example, if the area A2 is ten times greater than the area A1 (A2=10*A1), the force F1 will also be transmitted at ten times its value. The pressure generated in the fluid by gravity alone is determined by Ph = ρ g h When designing hydraulic systems it is necessary to check whether the gravitational pressure is of any notable size compared with the pressures occurring within the system. Generally the gravitational pressure is not of any note because it is often less than the required system pressure. 7-38

257 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Pressure transmission The principle of pressure transmission: A1 A Continuity equation Assumption: A fluid flows through a tube with various cross sectional areas. As no fluid is lost between the various cross sectional areas, the following applies for the mass flows that stream through these areas: F1 F2 A1 V1 = A2 V2 = A3 V3 = const Bernoulli s equation P2 = P1 A1 A2 S1 S2 Bernoulli s equation is a special case derived from the familiar Navier-Stokes equation from fluid mechanics, which apply to three-dimensional viscous flows. The equation for the energy form is: = const. If, for example, the area A1 is twice the size of area A2 ( A1=2*A1), the pressure P1 will be transmitted at double its value Hydraulic work On the hydraulic press, if piston 1 is moved downwards along the path S1 with the area A1 and force F1, the hydraulic work executed in the process is W1. The hydraulic work executed at piston 2 A2 during this process is W Volumetric efficiency factor This takes into account the volumetric losses resulting from leakage flows. The hydraulicmechanical efficiency factor gauges the losses resulting from flow losses and sliding machine parts Flow forms Laminar or turbulent flow forms occur in the tubes of hydraulic systems. With a laminar flow, the fluid particles move in orderly, separate layers, which is why we talk of a flow direction. The flow lines run in parallel to the tube axis. With a turbulent flow, the fluid no longer moves in orderly layers. The main axial flow is now superimposed on all points through random longitudinal and transverse movements, that result in a disturbed flow. The flow is thereby mixed. The transition from a laminar to a turbulent flow occurs in straight tubes with a circular cross section when the critical REYNOLDS NUMBER Recrit = 2320 vcrit = Re crit x v d 7-39

258 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Viscosity A surface-mounted plate with an area A is moved at constant speed V on a fluid layer with a defined height h. The force F is required to maintain the movement. If the layer thickness A is not too great, a linear velocity gradient develops between the plate and the bottom of the fluid. The law discovered by Newton Cavitation Cavitation describes the formation of bubbles (air and steam bubbles) on bottlenecks in hydraulic components due to pressure drops and the sudden breakdown of these bubbles once the bottleneck is passed. A distinction is made between two types of cavitation: Air bubble cavitation and steam bubble cavitation. Both types of cavitation have similarly negative effects on the components in hydraulic systems Air bubble cavitation is known as Newton s law of friction. τ stands for the friction shear stress and η for the dynamic viscosity of the fluid, which as a property represents a measurement for the internal friction, which makes it more difficult for the fluid particles to move. The energy expended in moving the particles is converted into heat. The definition of the viscosity used in hydraulics: Pressure losses in tubes, fittings and valves One property of fluids is the ability to dissolve gases. In this context, we talk of the gas dissolving capacity of fluids. Hydraulic oils in particular contain air in a dissolved state. As well as being present in a dissolved state, air can also occur as air bubbles within the oil. This happens when the oil s static pressure on-site drops to the dissolved gas pressure and therefore the oil s capacity to absorb air is exhausted Steam bubble cavitation This occurs when steam bubbles are formed in the oil because the static pressure drops to or below the steam pressure of the oil. Here too, the pressure drops due to the increased flow rates present at bottlenecks in hydraulic components. When fluid flow is friction-free, the total energy comprising pressure energy, kinetic and potential energy is constant. With real fluid flows (subjected to friction), due to the influence of the viscosity, part of the flow energy is converted into thermal energy, which cannot be utilised technically and is therefore associated with flow loss. Only pressure energy can be affected by losses due to frictional influences. Considerable pressure losses occur in fittings (tube bends, tube branches, extensions, narrowings) due to frictional influences. The calculated resistance coefficient is used for the numeric simulation. 7-40

259 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Hydro pumps At the heart of any hydraulic system is the hydro pump. The mechanical energy fed via its drive shaft, generally through an electric motor, is needed to increase the energy or pressure of the oil flowing through the pump and to cover all the losses that occur within the pump. The energy of the flow rate leaving the pump s pressure port, also known as hydrostatic energy, is then available to operate hydraulic applications. Hydro systems generally require high pressures at low flow rates; only in rare cases are these greater than 300 l/min. For this reason, centrifugal pumps are not suitable for this type of application. Hydro pumps operate in accordance with the displacement principle, like radial piston pumps for example. This system is based on the reducing and expanding space. The displacement volume, also known as stroke volume, is understood to be the volume of oil delivered when a pump rotates. On hydro pumps, the distinction is made between constant and variable pumps. On constant pumps, the displacement volume Vi cannot be varied. On variable pumps, the displacement volume Vi is a changeable variable and is dependent on the volume setting. The theoretical flow rate of the pump is calculated by multiplying the displacement volume by the pump speed. Piston pressure force Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units F P A F = 10 p A F = p A η 10 A = d 2 π 4 A = 4 F 0,1 π p F = Piston pressure force [N] p = Hydraulic pressure [bar] A = Piston area [cm²] d = Piston diameter [cm] η = Cylinder efficiency factor p = F π d 2 Piston forces Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units A Pe F F = Pe A 10 F = Pe A η 10 A = d 2 π 4 A for circular ring area: F = Piston pressure force [N] Pe = Excess pressure on the piston [bar] A = Effective piston area [cm²] d = Piston diameter [cm] η = Cylinder efficiency factor A = (D - d 2 ) π 4 A Pe F 7-41

260 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Piston forces Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units S 2 F 2 F 1 S 1 F1 = F2 A A 1 2 F 1 s 1 = F 2 s 2 φ = F1 = A1 = F A 2 2 s 2 s 2 F 1 = Force on the pump piston [N] F 2 = Force on the working piston [N] A 1 = Area of pump piston [cm²] A 2 = Area of working piston [cm²] s = Travel of pump piston [cm] 1 s 2 = Travel of working piston [cm] φ = Transmission ratio A 2 A 1 Continuity equation Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units Q 1 A 1 A 2 v 1 v 2 Q 2 Q 1 = Q 2 Q 1 = A 1 v 1 Q 2 = A 2 v 2 A 1 v 1= A 2 v2 Q 1,2 = Volume flow rates [cm³/s, dm³/s, m³/s ] A 1,2 = Cross-sectional areas [cm², dm², m²] v 1,2 = Flow speeds [cm/s, dm/s, m/s] Piston speed Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units A1 Q 1 v 1 v 1 = v 2 = A 1 = Q A Q A d π 4 v 1,2 = Piston speed [cm/s] Q = Volume flow rate [cm³/s] A A 1,2 1 2 = Effective piston area (circle) [cm²] = Effective piston area (ring) [cm²] A 2 = 2 2 (D - d ) π 4 A2 v 2 Q 2 Pressure intensifier Graphic Equation/equation conversion Formula symbol/units p 2 A 2 A = p A p = Pressure in the small cylinder [bar] 1 A 1 = Piston area [cm²] p = Pressure on the large cylinder [bar] 2 A 2 = Piston area [cm²] p p 1 A

261 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Structure of a hydraulic system The hydraulic circuit diagram shows the structure of a hydraulic circuit. The individual hydraulic devices are represented by standardised symbols and are interconnected through pipelines. The diagrams that follow illustrate simple hydraulic circuits. In this case, the devices are not represented by standardised symbols but are shown schematically to identify their mode of operation. The pump sucks the hydraulic oil from the container and pushes it into the pipeline system containing the built-in devices. The oil flows from P to B through a directional valve in the hydro cylinder. The piston (with tool) creates resistance for the oil. The pressure rises in the power section between the pump and piston until the piston force is sufficient to overcome the load and the piston moves Simple hydraulic circuit, upward movement The directional valve is held in position by any amount of force. The piston travels to the top end position. The displaced oil flows through the directional valve from A to T, back to the tank. The directional valve therefore controls the direction of the oil flow. To ensure that the system is protected from excessive loads (pressures), a pressure relief valve is installed in the pressure line, after the pump. If the set pressure is exceeded, the valve will open and the remaining oil will flow into the tank. The pressure will not increase any further. Cylinder, doubleaction B Pressure limiting valve Tank Load Directional valve P Pressure line A,B Consumer connection lines T Tank return line Structure of a hydraulic system. T P A Actuation force Pump 7-43

262 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Simple hydraulic circuit, downward movement When the piston reaches the top end position, the actuation force is removed and the directional valve is reset via spring force. Now the oil flows from P to A to the rod side of the piston. The piston moves towards the bottom end position, the displaced oil flows through the directional valve from B to T, back to the tank. Switching the directional valve in the piston end positions enables the piston to continuously move back and forth Simple hydraulic circuit, speed If it s necessary to control not only the direction of the piston but also the speed, the amount of oil flowing in and out of the cylinder will need to be varied. This can be done using a choke valve: For example, if the valve cross section is reduced, less oil will flow into the cylinder over a defined unit of time. The oil flow is less than before it was choked, so the piston speed will also be slower, in accordance with the continuity equation. In other words, the piston speed is proportional to the oil flow. So the speed is controlled by controlling the oil flow. Load Load Choke valve Without valve actuation Actuation force T T B P A B Pressure limiting valve P A Downward movement on a simple hydraulic circuit. Speed control on an individual hydraulic circuit. 7-44

263 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Circuit diagram for a simple hydraulic circuit The hydraulic process described above is illustrated below as a hydraulic circuit diagram. The directional valve is manually operated; when unoperated it is held in the spring-centred middle position by spring force. Cylinder Choke valve Pressure limiting valve Manually operated directional valve in bypass position Check valve Pump Tank M Drive motor Circuit diagram for a simple hydraulic circuit 7-45

264 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Two cylinder control systems with electric valves If two or more cylinders are to be used on a hydraulic system, various requirements can be associated with their use, and these can be implemented using various circuit types: Sequential circuits Synchronous circuits Series circuits Parallel circuits The diagram below shows a sequential circuit (sequential circuit with limit switches and solenoid valves): In the version with limit switches, the limit switches actuate the piston rods, based on the path (the electrics are not shown): 1. Start: Solenoid Y1 is energised, directional valve 1 to the right, piston on cylinder 1 to the right. 2. Limit switch 2 actuated: Solenoid Y1 deenergised, solenoid Y3 energised, directional valve 2 to the right, piston on cylinder 2 to the right 3. Limit switch 4 actuated: Solenoid Y3 deenergised, solenoid Y2 energised, directional valve 1 to the left, piston on cylinder 2 to the left 4. Limit switch 1 actuated: Solenoid Y2 deenergised, solenoid Y4 energised, directional valve 2 to the left, piston on cylinder 2 to the left 5. Limit switch 3 actuated: Solenoid Y4 deenergised, solenoid Y1 energised, directional valve 1 to the right, piston on cylinder 1 to the right Limit switch 1 Limit switch 2 Limit switch 3 Limit switch 4 Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 Magnet Magnet Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Directional valve 1 Directional valve 2 M Circuit diagram for two cylinder control systems with electric valves. 7-46

265 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Two cylinder control systems with sequence valves Sequence valves 1 and 2 are pressure valves which open at a certain pressure, which can be selected. They close again when the pressure drops. This results in the following motion sequence: 1. Start: Left directional valve is activated, the piston side of cylinder 1 is pressurised, the cylinder extends. When the piston stops, the pressure rises above the value set on the pressure limiting valve; sequence valve 2 opens. 2. The pressure flows into cylinder 2; this cylinder also extends. 3. Right directional valve is activated, the rod side of cylinder 2 is pressurised, the cylinder retracts. When the piston stops, the pressure rises above the value set on the pressure limiting valve; sequence valve 1 opens. 4. As a result, cylinder 1 receives flow. The piston also retracts. 5. The switchover of the directional valve is activated via limit switches. Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 Sequence valve 1 2 Directional valve Pressure limiting valve Check valve M Circuit diagram for two cylinder control systems with sequence valves. 7-47

266 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Series circuit A series circuit is implemented as with valves connected in series. The return line is not guided back into the tank, as with a single circuit, but to the directional valve on the second cylinder. If both cylinders are operated simultaneously in this type of circuit, the piston force and piston speed will influence each other. The result is the following relationships: System pressure p, which acts upon the piston area of cylinder 1, must be large enough not only to generate its own lifting force F1 but also to overcome the counteracting force F G1, generated by cylinder 2. This counteracting force comes from the fact the oil pressure needed to operate cylinder 2 in turn acts upon the piston ring area of cylinder 1. The ring area of cylinder 1 displaces the oil and conveys it to cylinder 2. Its speed depends therefore on the return flow rate from cylinder 1. The relationship between the extending speed of cylinder 1 and the extending speed of cylinder 2 is the same as the relationship between the piston area of cylinder 2 and the ring area of cylinder Parallel circuit In contrast to a series circuit, with a parallel circuit there is no mutual influencing when all the cylinders operate simultaneously. Oil is supplied via a branch pipe line. The system pressure set at the pressure limiting valve prevails as far as the directional valves. With a parallel circuit, sufficient fluid must be available to maintain the necessary system pressure if the cylinders are to be extended simultaneously. If the pump conveys too little fluid, the cylinder with the lowest operating resistance will extend first. If it is in the end position, the pressure continues to rise until it is sufficient for the next cylinder. So the extension of the cylinders depends on the necessary operating pressure. p F G1 F 1 A 1 V 1 A R1 Directional valves F 2 A 2 V 2 A R2 Return line M Pressure limiting valve Circuit diagram for a series circuit 7-48

267 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Doubleacting cylinder Directional valves (4/3 valves) Singleacting cylinder Directional valves (3/2 valve) T T T Manometer M Variable pump Circuit diagram for a parallel circuit Differential circuit The rod chamber is constantly under pressure, the piston chamber is connected to a directional valve. This circuit is called a differential circuit because the force acted upon the piston rod is expressed as a ratio of piston area to rod area. The differential circuit is used when the piston must be hydraulically clamped and the pump must be as small as possible. If the piston extends via the directional valve, the fluid dispersed from the ring area will be combined with the pump flow ahead of the directional valve and will be fed back to the piston side of the cylinder. With this circuit, the force exerted by the piston rod is calculated from the product of pressure times rod area. Piston chamber Directional valve (3/2 valve) Current regulating valve M Rod chamber Circuit diagram for a differential circuit 7-49

268 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Speed control systems Flow control valves are used for speed control. Flow valves are choke valves or flow control valves. There are two options: primary or secondary control. Primary control: With primary control, the flow valve sits in the inlet between the directional valve and the cylinder. It controls the inflowing hydraulic fluid. The graphic symbol shows a two-way flow control valve. A check valve is connected in parallel, which blocks the inflow but lets the return flow through. As a result, the fluid flows through the flow valve only on the infeed and not on the return. Only the piston s extension speed is controlled in this case. Two flow control valves must be installed if the retract speed is also to be controlled. The disadvantage of primary control is that the piston jumps if the operating resistance suddenly drops. A back pressure valve can prevent this. Secondary control: With secondary control, the flow valve sits in the outlet between the directional valve and the cylinder. As such, it controls the return flow. The graphic symbol shows a two-way flow control valve. A check valve is connected in parallel, which blocks the outflow but lets the return flow through. As a result, the fluid flows through the flow valve only on the infeed and not on the return. Only the piston s extension speed is controlled in this case. Two flow control valves must be installed if the retract speed is also to be controlled. Secondary control does not have the disadvantage that the piston can jump. 1 2 Without back pressure valve Circuit diagram for primary control Circuit diagram for secondary control 7-50

269 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Suction chamber Discharge chamber Fixed axial gap Externally toothed gear pumps Drive pumps, fixed pumps On fixed pumps, the displacement volume cannot be changed. The principle: The fluid conveyed from the suction side to the discharge side is displaced alternately from the gaps through the interlocking cogs. Advantages: Low-cost standard pump with high efficiency factor, which can be connected to other pumps working to the same principle. Disadvantages: High noise level. Application: In open circuits in industrial applications Internally toothed gear pumps: A driven pinion shaft (1) carries a toothed wheel (2). The principle: The tooth chambers are filled on the suction side, the filler separates the suction and discharge zone on the discharge side. On the discharge side, the oil is displaced through the gear ring. Advantages: Low-noise standard pump with high efficiency factor, which can be connected to other pumps working to the same principle, lower noise level. Disadvantages: More expensive than the traditional gear pump. Application: In open circuits in industrial applications, where quiet running is an important requirement. 1 Pinion shaft 2 Gear ring 3 Filler pin 4 Filler 5 Hydrostatic bearing 6 Suction port 7 Discharge port Internally toothed gear pumps

270 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Auxiliary spindle Drive spindle Suction nozzle Discharge nozzle Screw pump Drive pumps, screw pumps Two spindles driven jointly. The principle: The meshing spindles form oil chambers within the housing, which are moved from the suction to the pressure nozzle as the spindles rotate. Advantages: Pulse-free flow rate, low noise level. Disadvantages: Relatively low efficiency factor due to high volumetric losses, so high oil viscosity is required. Application: In open circuits in industry; for example, on precision machines and in the lift industry. High volume flows. 7-52

271 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.4 Hydraulic design Transport Suction s Vane Rotor Housing s Suction Transport 2 e + s 2 e + s Drive pump with vane cells Drive pumps, vane pumps Moving vanes in the slots on the rotor. The principle: The moving vanes located in the slots on the rotor are pressed against the housing wall by centrifugal force and pressure. The cell size increases in conjunction with the suction port and reduces in conjunction with the discharge port. Advantages: Pulse-free flow rate, low noise level, can be flanged to multi-flow pumps. Disadvantages: Low efficiency factor as gear pumps, more sensitive to dirt. Application: In open circuits in industry; for example, on precision machines with low pressure. 7-53

272 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Safety requirements in general When designing hydraulic systems for machinery, all the intended operating states and applications must be taken into account. To determine the hazards, a risk assessment must be carried out in accordance with DIN EN ISO , As far as is practicable, all identified risks should be designed out of the system where possible. Where this is impossible, appropriate safeguards should be provided Concept and design All system components should be selected in such a way that they guarantee safety during operation and operate within the limits defined in the design. All parts of the system must be designed to withstand pressures corresponding to the maximum operating pressure of the system or any other component; if not, further protective measures should be put in place. Preferred safeguards against excess pressure are one or more pressure limiting valves, which restrict pressure in all parts of the system. Systems should be designed, built and configured to minimise pressure surges and pressure increases. A pressure surge and increased pressure must not give rise to any hazard Additional safety requirements Leakages: Must not give rise to any hazard Energy supply: The electrical or hydraulic energy supply must not cause a hazard Switching the energy supply on or off Energy reduction Failure and/or restoration of energy Unexpected start-up: The system is to be designed in such a way that, when the pressurised medium is completely isolated, an unexpected restart is prevented. Mechanical interlock on stop valves in the stop position, plus removal of pressure Isolation from the electrical supply (EN ) Mechanical movements: Must not lead to a situation in which persons are endangered, whether intentionally or unintentionally Low-noise design: Compliance with ISO/TR is essential Operating temperatures: The temperature of the pressure medium must not exceed the maximum operating temperature stated as the limit value for all the system s components. Operating pressure range: Must be complied with 7-54

273 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Couplings or fastenings: Drive couplings and fastenings must be capable of withstanding the maximum torque under all operating conditions on a sustained basis. Speed: The speed must not exceed the maximum value stated in the manufacturer s documentation. Lift stops: Appropriate means should be used to secure adjustable lift stops. Valves with defined switching position: Any drive that must maintain its position or adopt a specific failsafe position in the event of a control failure must be controlled by a valve which guarantees a defined switching position, either via a spring pre-load or an interlocking device. Hydraulic systems with hydraulic accumulator: Hydraulic systems with hydraulic accumulators are used to automatically relieve the storage fluid pressure or to safely shut off the hydraulic accumulator. Hydraulic accumulators and the associated pressurised components must operate within the specified limits, temperatures and environmental conditions Establishing compliance with the safety requirements As a hydraulic system is generally not a complete machine, many test procedures cannot be carried out until the hydraulic system is incorporated into a machine. See below, from DIN EN 982 clause 6: Clause 6: Inspection The systems and their components shall be verified by inspecting their identification in comparison to the system specifications. In addition, the connection of components on the hydraulic system shall be inspected to verify its compliance with the circuit diagram. Clause 6.2: Testing The following tests shall be conducted to determine compliance with the applicable safety requirements. Operational tests to prove the correct operation of the system and all safety devices. Pressure tests to test each part of the system at the maximum working pressure which may be sustained under all conditions of intended use. Important: Measurable leakage is defined as slight wetting insufficient to form a drop. 7-55

274 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Drive elements Scope of categories (valve area) VDB RF Energy conversion Energy transmission M N T LF Fluid power system Safety-related parts of hydraulic control systems On fluid power systems, any valves that control hazardous movements or conditions should be regarded as safety-related parts of the control system. On hydraulic systems, measures taken within the system to limit pressure (VDB) and to filtrate the hydraulic fluid (RF) should also be taken into account, although these components are not directly control components. 7-56

275 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Control systems in accordance with Category B, Performance Level a Category B is the basic category; its requirements apply to all other categories. These requirements also incorporate the basic safety principles. The basic safety principles which are particularly relevant and specific for fluid power systems are: De-energisation principle (positive signal for starting) Management of energy changes, failure and restoration of energy Pressure limitation within the system Selection of an appropriate hydraulic fluid Filtration of the pressure medium Avoidance of contamination Isolation of energy supply All the valves listed in the relevant standards can be selected for all of the above components. They must comply with the basic requirements for shock, temperature, pressure, viscosity etc. Compliance with the basic safety principles requires that the safety-related switch position for these valves must be achieved when the control signal is removed (effective springs) The basic safety principles also refer to the pressure medium. The type and state are highly significant. Sufficient filtration of the pressure medium On Category B control systems, it must be accepted that a component failure can lead to the loss of the safety function 7-57

276 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Hazardous movement Proven safety-related valve WV Other consumers DF VDB RF M N T LF Example of hydraulic circuit (Cat 1, PL b) Control systems in accordance with Category 1, Performance Level b In addition to the requirements from Category B, Category 1 control systems must be designed and constructed using well-tried safety principles and well-tried components. Generally well-tried principles are: Torque/force limitation (reduced pressure) Reduced speed (reduced flow rate) Over-dimensioning Travel limiting jog mode Sufficient positive overlapping in piston valves Positive force (positive mechanical action) Targeted selection of materials and material pairings Expose safety-related springs to at least 10 % above the endurance limit based on 10 7 duty cycles 7-58

277 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Hazardous movement WV VDB RF M N T LF Example of hydraulic circuit (Cat 2, PL b) Control systems in accordance with Category 2, Performance Level b In addition to the requirements from Category B and the use of well-tried safety principles, Category 2 control systems must be designed so that their safety functions are checked at suitable intervals by the machine control system. Only one directional valve controls the hazardous movement. The electrical machine control system must test the valve s safety function as part of each cycle and on each machine start-up. The failure of a directional valve must not be able to influence the test function. Conversely, if the test function should fail, this must not affect the reliability of the directional valve. Two position switches detect each time the valve s sliding piston moves away from its safety-related middle setting. If the machine control system detects a failure in a directional valve, it immediately triggers a machine shutdown. 7-59

278 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Hazardous movement WV VDB RF M N T LF The pump drive motor M is switched off by means of a monitored power contactor when the safety function is requested. Example of hydraulic circuit (Cat 3, PL d) Control systems in accordance with Category 3, Performance Level d In addition to the requirements from Category B and the use of well-tried safety principles, Category 3 control systems must be designed so that a single fault never leads to the loss of the safety function. In terms of safety, the hazardous movement is controlled by directional valves that switch as part of each cycle, plus pump drive motors. This circuit is only single fault tolerant if the shutdown of the pump motor in the event of a valve failure does not cause the cylinder s stopping performance to exceed the permitted length. A monitored power contact with appropriate fault detection is responsible for shutting down the pump drive. In this case, the movement of the valve s sliding piston away from the safety-related middle setting is not interrogated, but two installed position switches should still detect the change of position. When the machine control system detects the failure of a directional valve, the machine is shut down safely. 7-60

279 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Hazardous movement WV1 WV2 VDB RF M N T LF Example of hydraulic circuit (Cat 4, PL e) Control systems in accordance with Category 4, Performance Level e In addition to the requirements from Category B and the use of well-tried safety principles, Category 4 control systems must be designed so that a single fault does not lead to the loss of the safety function. The objective of safety concepts is for a single fault to be detected at or before the next demand upon the safety function. Two valves control the hazardous movement. Each valve is able to shut down the hazardous movement on its own, so single fault tolerance is provided. Both valves are also equipped with electrical position monitoring. This ensures that all possible single faults are detected early by the control system. 7-61

280 Chapter 7 Mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic design 7.5 Safety requirements on hydraulic circuits Further example for control systems in accordance with Category 4, Performance Level e In this hydraulic control system, only the downward movement is monitored in terms of safety (compare hydraulic press). Two electrically monitored valves WV1 and WV3 control the build-up of pressure on the upper side of the piston; valves WV2 and WV1 are responsible for reducing the pressure. Valves WV1, WV2, WV3 are equipped with electrical position monitoring. Working in conjunction with the control system, this guarantees that all faults are detected. By monitoring the main stage of valve WV2, any failure in the pilot valve WV4 will be detected at the same time. The pressure limiting valve VDB is designed as an electrically adjustable pressure valve with a pressure limiting function. Hazardous movement WV4 SV WV2 WV1 WV3 VDB RF M N T LF Example of hydraulic circuit (Cat 4, PL e) 7-62

281

282

283 8 Appendix

Safety Assessments Revised Toy Safety Directive 2009/48/EC

Safety Assessments Revised Toy Safety Directive 2009/48/EC Toy Safety Update Safety Assessments Revised Toy Safety Directive 2009/48/EC Contents 1. Obligations of Economic Operators 2. Introduction 3. Overview 4. How to use this guide 5. Approach to Safety Assessment

More information

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group "Pressure"

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group Pressure I. MISCELLANEOUS Guideline I-01 Guideline related to: Article 4 paragraph 3 What is to be understood by "sound engineering practice"? Sound engineering practice means, without prejudice to Article 5, paragraph

More information

European Directive 2007/23/EC on the Placing on the Market of Pyrotechnical Articles: Are you concerned?

European Directive 2007/23/EC on the Placing on the Market of Pyrotechnical Articles: Are you concerned? Author manuscript, published in "35. International Pyrotechnics Seminar (IPS 2008), Fort Collins : United States (2008)" European Directive 2007/23/EC on the Placing on the Market of Pyrotechnical Articles:

More information

GUIDELINES. Systems. Pressure. Guidelines Acceptance of equipment, establishment of safe operating limits and fitness for service

GUIDELINES. Systems. Pressure. Guidelines Acceptance of equipment, establishment of safe operating limits and fitness for service GUIDELINES Pressure Systems Guidelines Acceptance of equipment, establishment of safe operating limits and fitness for service Document Reference: PSG 16 Issue 04 Dated 13/09/16 The Safety Assessment Federation

More information

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group "Pressure"

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group Pressure H. INTERPRETATION OF OTHER ESSENTIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Guideline H-02 Guideline related to: Annex I Section 3.2.2 and 7.4 Final assessment (Annex I Section 3.2.2) of pressure equipment must include a

More information

Conformity with Relevant Standards and CE Marking

Conformity with Relevant Standards and CE Marking SELECTION Suitability for Task and Environment The Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1998 (PUWER), Regulation 4, requires the employer to ensure that work equipment is designed or adapted

More information

Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC Page 033 of 124

Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC Page 033 of 124 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC Page 033 of 124 13.7 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC 1 The Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC applies to the design, manufacturing and conformity

More information

Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) Directive 97/23/EC. Pressure Equipment (PED) --- Baltic Pressure Equipment Workshop Riga, November 2003

Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) Directive 97/23/EC. Pressure Equipment (PED) --- Baltic Pressure Equipment Workshop Riga, November 2003 Directive 97/23/EC on Pressure Equipment (PED) --- Baltic Pressure Equipment Workshop Riga, 27-28 November 2003 1 Fundamentals Roots at the times of the Industrial revolution Technically one of most complex

More information

Manuals Mandatory! New EU Legislation for Electrical Appliances. Matthias Schulz, Erkelenz AXELENT ProfiServices

Manuals Mandatory! New EU Legislation for Electrical Appliances. Matthias Schulz, Erkelenz AXELENT ProfiServices Manuals Mandatory! New EU Legislation for Electrical Appliances Matthias Schulz, Erkelenz AXELENT ProfiServices www.axelentsafety.de 28 Countries, One Market, Common Rules What s ahead Short introduction

More information

New Thinking in Control Reliability

New Thinking in Control Reliability Doug Nix, A.Sc.T. Compliance InSight Consulting Inc. New Thinking in Control Reliability Or Your Next Big Headache www.machinerysafety101.com (519) 729-5704 Control Reliability Burning Questions from the

More information

Information sheet swimming pools Page 1 of 8. Introduction INFORMATION SHEET LVD ADCO PUMPS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES FOR MOBILE SWIMMING POOLS

Information sheet swimming pools Page 1 of 8. Introduction INFORMATION SHEET LVD ADCO PUMPS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES FOR MOBILE SWIMMING POOLS Information sheet swimming pools Page 1 of 8 Introduction INFORMATION SHEET LVD ADCO PUMPS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES FOR MOBILE SWIMMING POOLS For a longer time the configuration and construction

More information

Farm Animals Breeding Act 1

Farm Animals Breeding Act 1 Issuer: Riigikogu Type: act In force from: 01.01.2015 In force until: 30.06.2017 Translation published: 10.04.2015 Farm Animals Breeding Act 1 Amended by the following acts Passed 06.11.2002 RT I 2002,

More information

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group "Pressure"

Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU Commission's Working Group Pressure F. INTERPRETATION OF THE ESSENTIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ON MANUFACTURING Guideline F-01 Guideline related to: Annex 1 Section 3.1.2 According to section 3.1.2 (permanent joining) of Annex I, the third party

More information

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES Publication date: 09-06-2015 All CERN Safety Rules are available on the website: https://www.cern.ch/safety-rules Page 1 of 8 1 INTRODUCTION

More information

Chapter 2.7 Bylaw sport governance and management

Chapter 2.7 Bylaw sport governance and management Chapter 2.7 Bylaw sport governance and management 2010 International Paralympic Committee Adenauerallee 212-214 Tel. +49 228 2097-200 www.paralympic.org 53113 Bonn, Germany Fax +49 228 2097-209 info@paralympic.org

More information

Lockout/Tagout CE Marking Requirements WHITE PAPER

Lockout/Tagout CE Marking Requirements WHITE PAPER The CE mark is used to assert that a particular product meets one or more of just over 20 European Directives. (IE: EMC Directive, Machinery Directive, Safety of Toys, etc). Taking into consideration the

More information

The Best Use of Lockout/Tagout and Control Reliable Circuits

The Best Use of Lockout/Tagout and Control Reliable Circuits Session No. 565 The Best Use of Lockout/Tagout and Control Reliable Circuits Introduction L. Tyson Ross, P.E., C.S.P. Principal LJB Inc. Dayton, Ohio Anyone involved in the design, installation, operation,

More information

A study on the relation between safety analysis process and system engineering process of train control system

A study on the relation between safety analysis process and system engineering process of train control system A study on the relation between safety analysis process and system engineering process of train control system Abstract - In this paper, the relationship between system engineering lifecycle and safety

More information

The Only Open Standard for Smart Metering Across all Energy Types

The Only Open Standard for Smart Metering Across all Energy Types Secure and Interoperable Communication of Metering Data with M-Bus The Only Open Standard for Smart Metering Across all Energy Types EN 13757-x I BSI TR-03109-1 I EU Mandate M/441 ISO 14543-3/EN 50090

More information

This document is meant purely as a documentation tool and the institutions do not assume any liability for its contents

This document is meant purely as a documentation tool and the institutions do not assume any liability for its contents 1999L0092 EN 27.06.2007 001.001 1 This document is meant purely as a documentation tool and the institutions do not assume any liability for its contents B DIRECTIVE 1999/92/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT

More information

Application Note. Safety Sub-function PUS Category 1, up to PL c. Application Note PUS, Category 1, up to PL c M20 S22 R20 M1 Q20

Application Note. Safety Sub-function PUS Category 1, up to PL c. Application Note PUS, Category 1, up to PL c M20 S22 R20 M1 Q20 Application Note Safety Sub-function PUS Category 1, up to PL c M20 Application Note PUS, Category 1, up to PL c M1 Q20 M2 S22 R20 G2 100227 Title... Application Note PUS, Category 1, up to PL c Version...

More information

WHS PROCEDURE P Plant Isolation. Approved by: Ruth Hampton Review Date: 6 th December 2015

WHS PROCEDURE P Plant Isolation. Approved by: Ruth Hampton Review Date: 6 th December 2015 5 WHS PROCEDURE P29-02 Page 1 of 7 Issue: 2 1. Intent The Salvation Army Australia Eastern Territory (TSA-AUE) is committed to the provision of a safe, healthy and injury free environment within the mission

More information

EUROPEAN CHAMPION CLUBS CUP CROSS COUNTRY PROMOTION AND RIGHTS

EUROPEAN CHAMPION CLUBS CUP CROSS COUNTRY PROMOTION AND RIGHTS EUROPEAN CHAMPION CLUBS CUP CROSS COUNTRY 1301. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS 1301.1. The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Champion Clubs Cup in Cross Country

More information

Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Pressure Systems/Equipment

Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Pressure Systems/Equipment RG 2 Edition 5 November 2018 - Draft for consultation Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Pressure Systems/Equipment RG 2 / Edition: 5 Page 1 of 10 Contents 1. Introduction 2 2. Scope - Inspection

More information

AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS

AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. AB Amber Grid Rules for Natural Gas Transmission System Balancing (hereinafter - the Rules) are designed to identify

More information

CENELEC GUIDE 32. Guidelines for Safety Related Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction for Low Voltage Equipment. Edition 1,

CENELEC GUIDE 32. Guidelines for Safety Related Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction for Low Voltage Equipment. Edition 1, CENELEC GUIDE 32 Guidelines for Safety Related Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction for Low Voltage Equipment Edition 1, 2014-07 CENELEC decided to adopt this new CENELEC Guide 32 through CLC Decision D147/C137.

More information

Farm Animals Breeding Act 1

Farm Animals Breeding Act 1 Issuer: Riigikogu Type: act In force from: 01.07.2014 In force until: mitte jõustunud Translation published: 06.01.2014 Farm Animals Breeding Act 1 Amended by the following acts Passed 06.11.2002 RT I

More information

UK Contractors Group Mobile Elevating Work Platforms Good Practice Toolkit June June 2015 Page 1 of 16

UK Contractors Group Mobile Elevating Work Platforms Good Practice Toolkit June June 2015 Page 1 of 16 UK Contractors Group Mobile Elevating Work Platforms Good Practice Toolkit www.ukcg.org Page 1 of 16 Contents Foreword Reference Material Initial Considerations Planning and Preparation for MEWP Activities

More information

Guidance on the Legal Obligations for Importers, Retailers and Distributors of Category 1 Fireworks

Guidance on the Legal Obligations for Importers, Retailers and Distributors of Category 1 Fireworks Guidance on the Legal Obligations for Importers, Retailers and Distributors of Category 1 Fireworks Issued by the Office of the Government Inspector of Explosives GD 8/2010 First Issued July 2010 Status:

More information

Safe management of industrial steam and hot water boilers A guide for owners, managers and supervisors of boilers, boiler houses and boiler plant

Safe management of industrial steam and hot water boilers A guide for owners, managers and supervisors of boilers, boiler houses and boiler plant Health and Safety Executive Safe management of industrial steam and hot water boilers A guide for owners, managers and supervisors of boilers, boiler houses and boiler plant Background Accidents involving

More information

Changes to the Gas. (Safety and Measurement) Regulations. effective 1 July 2013

Changes to the Gas. (Safety and Measurement) Regulations. effective 1 July 2013 Changes to the Gas (Safety and Measurement) Regulations effective 1 July 2013 www.energysafety.govt.nz www.pgdb.co.nz www.standards.co.nz Changes to the gas certification regime under the Gas (Safety and

More information

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year.

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year. EUROPEAN CROSS COUNTRY CHAMPIONSHIPS 301. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS 301.1. The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year.

More information

Safety in pneumatic automation

Safety in pneumatic automation Safety in pneumatic automation Pharm connect congress 2014 Budapest Feb. 26. 27. Thomas Schulz Head of ISM and KAM Biotech/Pharma Phone: +49-711/347-52192 Mail: thss@de.festo.com Thomas Schulz / CP-KB

More information

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-2 STANDARD PRESSURE EQUIPMENT

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-2 STANDARD PRESSURE EQUIPMENT GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION GSI-M-2 STANDARD PRESSURE EQUIPMENT Publication date: 09-06-2015 All CERN Safety Rules are available on the web site: https://www.cern.ch/safety-rules Page 1 of 8 1 INTRODUCTION

More information

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ISO 8655-4 First edition 2002-09-15 Piston-operated volumetric apparatus Part 4: Dilutors Appareils volumétriques à piston Partie 4: Diluteurs Reference number ISO 8655-4:2002(E)

More information

E PGN-11. Part of NTW (O)32 Estates Operations and Maintenance Policy Paul McCabe Head of Estates and Facilities-NTW Solution Ltd

E PGN-11. Part of NTW (O)32 Estates Operations and Maintenance Policy Paul McCabe Head of Estates and Facilities-NTW Solution Ltd Estates Operations and Maintenance Practice Guidance Note Management of Pressure Systems V01 Date Issued Planned Review PGN No: Issue 1 - Nov 2015 Issue 2 Nov 2017 Author / Designation Responsible Officer

More information

Understanding safety life cycles

Understanding safety life cycles Understanding safety life cycles IEC/EN 61508 is the basis for the specification, design, and operation of safety instrumented systems (SIS) Fast Forward: IEC/EN 61508 standards need to be implemented

More information

Safely on the way in the automotive and Tier 1 supplier industry

Safely on the way in the automotive and Tier 1 supplier industry Safely on the way in the automotive and Tier 1 supplier industry Safety Designing circuits Safety concept Risk assessment Performance Level Category Safety function Reach your destination of maximum machine

More information

RESOLUTION 15/04 CONCERNING THE IOTC RECORD OF VESSELS AUTHORISED TO OPERATE IN THE IOTC AREA OF

RESOLUTION 15/04 CONCERNING THE IOTC RECORD OF VESSELS AUTHORISED TO OPERATE IN THE IOTC AREA OF RESOLUTION 15/04 CONCERNING THE IOTC RECORD OF VESSELS AUTHORISED TO OPERATE IN THE IOTC AREA OF COMPETENCE Keywords: Authorised vessels; active vessels; auxiliary, supply and support vessels; IMO number;

More information

No. 24 of Professional Boxing Control Board Act Certified on: / /20.

No. 24 of Professional Boxing Control Board Act Certified on: / /20. No. 24 of 1991. Professional Boxing Control Board Act 1991. Certified on: / /20. INDEPENDENT STATE OF PAPUA NEW GUINEA. No. 24 of 1991. Professional Boxing Control Board Act 1991. ARRANGEMENT OF SECTIONS.

More information

DETERMINATION OF SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY- RELATED PROTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS - IEC 61508

DETERMINATION OF SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY- RELATED PROTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS - IEC 61508 DETERMINATION OF SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY- RELATED PROTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS - IEC 61508 Simon J Brown Technology Division, Health & Safety Executive, Bootle, Merseyside L20 3QZ, UK Crown Copyright

More information

The following gives a brief overview of the characteristics of the most commonly used devices.

The following gives a brief overview of the characteristics of the most commonly used devices. SAFETY RELATED CONTROL SYSTEMS In a previous article we discussed the issues relating to machine safety systems focusing mainly on the PUWER regulations and risk assessments. In this issue will take this

More information

Light beam devices. Product range Light beam devices

Light beam devices. Product range Light beam devices Product range When the production process requires active intervention, light beam devices from the product range PSENopt provide optimum protection for plant and machinery. PSENopt provide finger, hand

More information

Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Transportable Pressure Receptacles (TPRs)

Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Transportable Pressure Receptacles (TPRs) RG 3 Edition 4 December 2018 Accreditation for In-Service Inspection of Transportable Pressure Receptacles (TPRs) RG 3 / Edition: 4 Page 1 of 8 Contents 1. Introduction 2 2. Scope - Inspection Services

More information

European directive 2007/23/EC on the placing on the market of pyrotechnical articles : are you concerned?

European directive 2007/23/EC on the placing on the market of pyrotechnical articles : are you concerned? European directive 2007/23/EC on the placing on the market of pyrotechnical articles : are you concerned? Lionel Aufauvre To cite this version: Lionel Aufauvre. European directive 2007/23/EC on the placing

More information

Unless this copy has been taken directly from the Trust intranet site (Pandora) there is no assurance that this is the most up to date version

Unless this copy has been taken directly from the Trust intranet site (Pandora) there is no assurance that this is the most up to date version Policy No: RM13 Version: 7.0 Name of Policy: Provision and Use of Work Equipment Policy Effective From: 26/04/2016 Date Ratified 10/03/2016 Ratified Health and Safety Committee Review Date 01/03/2018 Sponsor

More information

Harmonisation of Work Health and Safety Legislation

Harmonisation of Work Health and Safety Legislation NATIONAL RESEARCH CENTRE FOR OHS REGULATION Work health and safety Briefing Work Health and Safety Harmonisation of Work Health and Safety Legislation Acts and regulations giving effect to the Australian

More information

IGEM/GL/5 Edition 3 Communication 1783 Managing new works, modifications and repairs

IGEM/GL/5 Edition 3 Communication 1783 Managing new works, modifications and repairs Communication 1783 Managing new works, modifications and repairs Founded 1863 Royal Charter 1929 Patron: Her Majesty the Queen Communication 1783 Managing new works, modifications and repairs Price Code:

More information

EXHIBITION Guide. Roles and Responsibilities OS11. A handbook for exhibitors and contractors

EXHIBITION Guide. Roles and Responsibilities OS11. A handbook for exhibitors and contractors Appendix 1 Health & Safety Declaration, Roles and Responsibilities Each exhibitor and Informa appointed contractor must complete the Health and Safety Declaration form provided below to confirm they have

More information

COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES. Proposal for a COUNCIL REGULATION

COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES. Proposal for a COUNCIL REGULATION COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES Proposal for a Brussels, 3.8.2009 COM(2009) 406 final 2009/0116 (CNS) C7-0124/09 COUNCIL REGULATION establishing a catch documentation programme for bluefin tuna

More information

WORKSHOP SAFE ENGINEERING

WORKSHOP SAFE ENGINEERING WORKSHOP Mikaël Degent SICK Product Manager Industrial Machine Expert Stefan Nerinckx SICK Certified Specialist Service Engineer RISK ASSESSMENT EN ISO 12100 Diagnostics before treatment! before! 2018

More information

REGULATION 8. ELIGIBILITY TO PLAY FOR NATIONAL REPRESENTATIVE TEAMS

REGULATION 8. ELIGIBILITY TO PLAY FOR NATIONAL REPRESENTATIVE TEAMS REGULATION 8. ELIGIBILITY TO PLAY FOR NATIONAL REPRESENTATIVE TEAMS 8.1 Subject to Regulation 8.2, a Player may only play for the senior fifteen-aside National Representative Team, the next senior fifteen-a-side

More information

Grantek Systems Integration

Grantek Systems Integration Grantek Systems Integration Understanding Machine Safeguarding and Lockout/Tagout October 18 th 2017 Jeff Winter, CSP, FS Eng. Director, Safety Practice Today s Speaker: Jeff Winter BIO: TUV Certified

More information

EUROPEAN COMBINED EVENTS TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS 701. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS

EUROPEAN COMBINED EVENTS TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS 701. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS EUROPEAN COMBINED EVENTS TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS 701. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS 701.1. The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Team Championships in Decathlon

More information

Application Note. Safety Sub-functions SSC Category 1, up to PL c PUS Category 1, up to PL c. Application Note SSC, PUS, Category 1, up to PL c STOP

Application Note. Safety Sub-functions SSC Category 1, up to PL c PUS Category 1, up to PL c. Application Note SSC, PUS, Category 1, up to PL c STOP Application Note Safety Sub-functions SSC Category 1, up to PL c PUS Category 1, up to PL c Application Note SSC, PUS, Category 1, up to PL c STOP 100231 Title... Application Note SSC, PUS, Category 1,

More information

PRESSURE SYSTEMS POLICY

PRESSURE SYSTEMS POLICY PRESSURE SYSTEMS POLICY PRESSURE SYSTEMS POLICY 1. Introduction 2. Policy Statement 3. Scope 4. Background 5. Roles & Responsibilities 6. Training 7. Contractors 8. Policy Review 1. Introduction The Kilmarnock

More information

Commissioning of gas-fired plant on industrial and commercial premises

Commissioning of gas-fired plant on industrial and commercial premises IGEM/UP/4 Edition 4 Communication 1801 Commissioning of gas-fired plant on industrial and commercial premises Founded 1863 Royal Charter 1929 Patron: Her Majesty the Queen IGEM/UP/4 Edition 4 Communication

More information

DECISION OF THE EEA JOINT COMMITTEE. No 206/2016. of 30 September amending Annex IX (Financial services) to the EEA Agreement [2017/283]

DECISION OF THE EEA JOINT COMMITTEE. No 206/2016. of 30 September amending Annex IX (Financial services) to the EEA Agreement [2017/283] 23.2.2017 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 46/53 DECISION OF THE EEA JOINT COMMITTEE No 206/2016 of 30 September 2016 amending Annex IX (Financial services) to the EEA Agreement [2017/283] THE

More information

BCGA GUIDANCE NOTE 17

BCGA GUIDANCE NOTE 17 BCGA GUIDANCE NOTE 17 BCGA POLICY AND GUIDANCE FOR THE SAFE FILLING OF THIRD-PARTY OWNED AND / OR MAINTAINED TANKS Revision 2: 2013 BCGA GUIDANCE NOTE 17 BCGA POLICY AND GUIDANCE FOR THE SAFE FILLING OF

More information

IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS

IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 1 : 2014 CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 1: 2014 Copyright 2014 by British Compressed

More information

Implementing IEC Standards for Safety Instrumented Systems

Implementing IEC Standards for Safety Instrumented Systems Implementing IEC Standards for Safety Instrumented Systems ABHAY THODGE TUV Certificate: PFSE-06-607 INVENSYS OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT What is a Safety Instrumented System (SIS)? An SIS is designed to: respond

More information

Functional safety. Functional safety of Programmable systems, devices & components: Requirements from global & national standards

Functional safety. Functional safety of Programmable systems, devices & components: Requirements from global & national standards Functional safety Functional safety of Programmable systems, devices & components: Requirements from global & national standards Matthias R. Heinze Vice President Engineering TUV Rheinland of N.A. Email

More information

LONE WORKING HEALTH AND SAFETY GUIDANCE

LONE WORKING HEALTH AND SAFETY GUIDANCE LONE WORKING HEALTH AND SAFETY GUIDANCE Revised March 2017: Version 3.1 Name of Policy: Purpose of the Policy: Policy Applies to: Approved by: Responsible for its Updating: Final Approval by: Lone Working

More information

SIL explained. Understanding the use of valve actuators in SIL rated safety instrumented systems ACTUATION

SIL explained. Understanding the use of valve actuators in SIL rated safety instrumented systems ACTUATION SIL explained Understanding the use of valve actuators in SIL rated safety instrumented systems The requirement for Safety Integrity Level (SIL) equipment can be complicated and confusing. In this document,

More information

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year.

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year. EUROPEAN CROSS COUNTRY CHAMPIONSHIPS 301. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS 301.1. The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European Cross Country Championships every year.

More information

Operating Mode Selection in Conjunction with Functional Safety Safety Integrated https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/ 89260861 Siemens Industry Online Support Siemens AG 2017 All rights

More information

Personal Protective Equipment

Personal Protective Equipment OCTOBER 2008 Health and Safety Specialised Topic Guide S5 Personal Protective Equipment Issue and Amendment Record Issue Number Date Comment 1 October 2008 First issue Specialised Topic Guide S5 Personal

More information

Requirements for the certification of movements and mechanical watches resistant to magnetic fields of 1.5 T ( G)

Requirements for the certification of movements and mechanical watches resistant to magnetic fields of 1.5 T ( G) Institut fédéral de métrologie METAS METAS-N001/EN Requirements for the certification of movements and mechanical watches resistant to magnetic fields of 1.5 T (15 000 G) This document is a translation

More information

Amusement Device Safety Council. Safety of Amusement Devices: Pre-use inspection

Amusement Device Safety Council. Safety of Amusement Devices: Pre-use inspection Amusement Device Safety Council Safety of Amusement Devices: Pre-use inspection This page is intentionally blank Amusement Device Safety Council Safety of Amusement Devices: Pre-use inspection Amusement

More information

EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES - CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS (ZONING) AND SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT

EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES - CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS (ZONING) AND SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES - CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS (ZONING) AND SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW ASSESSING THE RISK RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN FIRES AND EXPLOSIONS CLASSIFYING HAZARDOUS AREAS INTO ZONES

More information

Introduction to Machine Safety Standards

Introduction to Machine Safety Standards Introduction to Machine Safety Standards Jon Riemer Solution Architect Safety & Security Functional Safety Engineer (TÜV Rheinland) Cyber Security Specialist (TÜV Rheinland) Agenda Understand the big picture

More information

Australian/New Zealand Standard

Australian/New Zealand Standard AS/NZS 3788:2006 AS/NZS 3788:2006 Australian/New Zealand Standard Pressure equipment In-service inspection AS/NZS 3788:2006 This Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard was prepared by Joint Technical Committee

More information

Low Voltage Electricity System Safety Rules & Associated Safety Guidance

Low Voltage Electricity System Safety Rules & Associated Safety Guidance Annex J To Loughborough University Facilities Management (FM) Health and Safety Policy Low Voltage Electricity System Safety Rules & Associated Safety Guidance 1. Introduction a. These Safety Rules are

More information

RISK ASSESSMENT. White Paper.

RISK ASSESSMENT. White Paper. RISK ASSESSMENT White Paper www.leuze.com White Paper RISK ASSESSMENT IN HARMONY The European Machinery Directive as well as its implementations on a national level (in Germany ProdSG and 9 ProdSV) require

More information

Personal Protective Equipment

Personal Protective Equipment Personal Protective Equipment Definition: In accordance with the definition in the European Directive 89/686/EEC of December 21st, 1989 about the approximation of the laws of the Member States related

More information

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European 10,000m Cup every year.

The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European 10,000m Cup every year. EUROPEAN 10,000m CUP 901. PROMOTION AND RIGHTS 901.1. The European Athletic Association (hereinafter European Athletics) shall promote a European 10,000m Cup every year. 901.2. All rights in and arising

More information

OCTOBER 2018 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

OCTOBER 2018 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY IOC Sustainability Report Sharing progress on our 2020 objectives OCTOBER 2018 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY IOC Sustainability Report: We are pleased to present this executive summary of the first Sustainability

More information

AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS

AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS AB AMBER GRID RULES FOR NATURAL GAS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BALANCING I. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. AB Amber Grid Rules for Natural Gas Transmission System Balancing (hereinafter - the Rules) are designed to identify

More information

LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT (LO/TO) SAFETY PROGRAM

LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT (LO/TO) SAFETY PROGRAM LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT (LO/TO) SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.147 BASIS: Approximately three million workers in the United States face risks from uncontrolled energy when servicing machinery

More information

MINE SAFETY TARGETED ASSESSMENT PROGRAM. Ground or strata failure NSW metalliferous mines. April

MINE SAFETY TARGETED ASSESSMENT PROGRAM. Ground or strata failure NSW metalliferous mines. April MINE SAFETY TARGETED ASSESSMENT PROGRAM Ground or strata failure NSW metalliferous mines April 2017 www.resourcesandenergy.nsw.gov.au Document control Publication title: Ground or strata failure NSW metalliferous

More information

Certification of AMS acc. EN 15267, Part 3 - Overview and First Experience -

Certification of AMS acc. EN 15267, Part 3 - Overview and First Experience - Certification of AMS acc. EN 15267, Part 3 - Overview and First Experience - Dr. Wolfgang Jockel, Martin Schneider, TÜV Rheinland Group, D-51105 Cologne / Germany 1. Introduction A new basis for the certification

More information

Classification Rules for ITTF Para Table Tennis

Classification Rules for ITTF Para Table Tennis Classification Rules for ITTF Para Table Tennis Rules consistent with the 2015 IPC Athlete Classification Code and accompanying International Standards January 2018 Organisation Organisation...2 Part One:

More information

Design and application of interlock devices and associated systems used with gas appliance installations in commercial catering establishments

Design and application of interlock devices and associated systems used with gas appliance installations in commercial catering establishments Communication 1773 Design and application of interlock devices and associated systems used with gas appliance installations in commercial catering establishments Founded 1863 Royal Charter 1929 Patron:

More information

SUP 15 Health & Safety Management Pressure Systems. Unified procedures for use within NHS Scotland

SUP 15 Health & Safety Management Pressure Systems. Unified procedures for use within NHS Scotland SUP 15 Health & Safety Management Pressure Systems Unified procedures for use within NHS Scotland September 2015 Contents Page Acknowledgements... 3 1. Introduction... 4 2. Purpose of this Procedure...

More information

Official Journal of the European Union L 92/3

Official Journal of the European Union L 92/3 3.4.2008 Official Journal of the European Union L 92/3 COMMISSION REGULATION (EC) No 303/2008 of 2 April 2008 establishing, pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 842/2006 of the European Parliament and of the

More information

SEMS II: BSEE should focus on eliminating human error

SEMS II: BSEE should focus on eliminating human error SEMS II: BSEE should focus on eliminating human error How US companies can prevent accidents on start-ups and shut-downs by using valve interlocks The proposed changes to BSEE s SEMS (Safety and Environmental

More information

The EFTA Court 1 Steen Treumer Lecturer, EIPA

The EFTA Court 1 Steen Treumer Lecturer, EIPA The EFTA Court 1 Steen Treumer Lecturer, EIPA Introduction In the relationship between the European Union and the EFTA States nearly all attention has recently been drawn to the enlargement negotiations

More information

Economic and Social Council

Economic and Social Council UNITED NATIONS E Economic and Social Council Distr. GENERAL TRANS/WP.1/2003/3/Rev.4 23 April 2004 ENGLISH Original: ENGLISH, FRENCH and RUSSIAN ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR EUROPE INLAND TRANSPORT COMMITTEE

More information

Transport of gas tanks for motor vehicles

Transport of gas tanks for motor vehicles United Nations Secretariat ST/SG/AC.10/C.3/2016/51 Distr.: General 30 August 2016 Original: English Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods and on the Globally Harmonized System of Classification

More information

CONTRACTOR WHS HAZARD STANDARD HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS EXTERNAL USE ONLY

CONTRACTOR WHS HAZARD STANDARD HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS EXTERNAL USE ONLY CONTRACTOR WHS HAZARD STANDARD HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS EXTERNAL USE ONLY Principles in the Optus Contractor WHS management process CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT STAGES PRINCIPLES THIS STANDARD REQUISITION Requisition

More information

Aberdeen Significant Error Review ITE Independent Report. Eur Ing Keith Vugler CEng FInstMC

Aberdeen Significant Error Review ITE Independent Report. Eur Ing Keith Vugler CEng FInstMC 1 Aberdeen Significant Error Review ITE Independent Report 331 Eur Ing Keith Vugler CEng FInstMC 2 Previous Presentation Summary My previous presentation (16 th July 2012) provided; an introduction to

More information

PAN AMERICAN GYMNASTICS UNION

PAN AMERICAN GYMNASTICS UNION TECHNICAL REGULATIONS - 2012 WOMEN S ARTISTIC GYMNASTICS INTRODUCTION These Technical Regulations are made under, and in conformity with, the Statutes of the Pan American Gymnastics Union. In consequence,

More information

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IEC TS 61245 Edition 2.0 2015-03 Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage ceramic and glass insulators to be used on d.c. systems INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION ICS

More information

CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 2: 2018

CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 2: 2018 CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 2: 2018 CODE OF PRACTICE 42 IMPLEMENTATION OF EIGA CARBON DIOXIDE STANDARDS REVISION 2: 2018 Copyright 2018 by British Compressed

More information

GM/GN2646. Guidance on Axle Bearing Maintenance. Issue One: March 2011 Rail Industry Guidance Note for GM/RT2004 Issue Four

GM/GN2646. Guidance on Axle Bearing Maintenance. Issue One: March 2011 Rail Industry Guidance Note for GM/RT2004 Issue Four GN Published by: Block 2 Angel Square 1 Torrens Street London EC1V 1NY Copyright 2011 Rail Safety and Standards Board Limited GM/GN2646 Issue One: March 2011 Rail Industry Guidance Note for GM/RT2004 Issue

More information

CONFLICT OF INTEREST POLICY

CONFLICT OF INTEREST POLICY Page 1 of 9 Version V01 10 December 2015 Page 2 of 9 Conflict of Interest Policy Version 01 Short description Relevant to Authority Responsible Unit/Department Policy on conflict of interests for IRB Barcelona

More information

FEDERATION OF PILING SPECIALISTS CODE OF INDUSTRY BEST PRACTICE LIFTING OPERATIONS AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS 1998

FEDERATION OF PILING SPECIALISTS CODE OF INDUSTRY BEST PRACTICE LIFTING OPERATIONS AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS 1998 FEDERATION OF PILING SPECIALISTS CODE OF INDUSTRY BEST PRACTICE LIFTING OPERATIONS AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS 1998 CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Definitions and Statements 3. LOLER Considerations

More information

SAFETY QUALITY TECHNOLOGY. Guidance on Safe Isolation Procedures

SAFETY QUALITY TECHNOLOGY. Guidance on Safe Isolation Procedures SAFETY QUALITY TECHNOLOGY Guidance on Safe Isolation Procedures Introduction Every year, people working on construction sites suffer electric shock and burn injuries some of which, tragically, are fatal.

More information

Safety Standards. of the Nuclear Safety Standards Commission (KTA)

Safety Standards. of the Nuclear Safety Standards Commission (KTA) Safety Standards of the Nuclear Safety Standards Commission (KTA) KTA 3409 (2009-11) Airlocks on the reactor containment of nuclear power plants - Equipment airlocks - (Schleusen am Reaktorsicherheitsbehälter

More information

International Paralympic Committee Athlete Classification Code. November 2015

International Paralympic Committee Athlete Classification Code. November 2015 International Paralympic Committee Athlete Classification Code November 2015 IPC Athlete Classification Code Rules, Policies, and Procedures for Athlete Classification November 2015 International Paralympic

More information